+

WO1999064043A9 - Muscarinic receptor antagonists - Google Patents

Muscarinic receptor antagonists

Info

Publication number
WO1999064043A9
WO1999064043A9 PCT/US1999/012733 US9912733W WO9964043A9 WO 1999064043 A9 WO1999064043 A9 WO 1999064043A9 US 9912733 W US9912733 W US 9912733W WO 9964043 A9 WO9964043 A9 WO 9964043A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ligand
linker
hydrogen
alkyl
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1999/012733
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1999064043A1 (en
Inventor
Mathai Mammen
David Oare
John H Griffin
James Aggen
Original Assignee
Advanced Medicine Inc
Mathai Mammen
David Oare
John H Griffin
James Aggen
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Advanced Medicine Inc, Mathai Mammen, David Oare, John H Griffin, James Aggen filed Critical Advanced Medicine Inc
Priority to JP2000553111A priority Critical patent/JP2002517464A/en
Priority to CA002315883A priority patent/CA2315883A1/en
Priority to EP99928444A priority patent/EP1086066A4/en
Priority to AU45508/99A priority patent/AU763638B2/en
Priority to NZ505329A priority patent/NZ505329A/en
Publication of WO1999064043A1 publication Critical patent/WO1999064043A1/en
Publication of WO1999064043A9 publication Critical patent/WO1999064043A9/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/08—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals directly attached to ring carbon atoms with radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals directly attached to ring carbon atoms with radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms attached to ring carbon atoms with only hydrogen atoms attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/06—Anti-spasmodics, e.g. drugs for colics, esophagic dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/30—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/32—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/40—Oxygen atoms
    • C07D211/44—Oxygen atoms attached in position 4
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • This invention relates to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are muscarinic receptor antagonsits, pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, and methods of preparing these compounds. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by these receptors such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
  • a receptor is a biological structure with one or more binding domains that reversibly complexes with one or more ligands. where that complexation has biological consequences.
  • Receptors can exist entirely outside the cell (extracellular receptors), within the cell membrane (but presenting sections of the receptor to the extracellular milieu and cytosol), or entirely within the cell (intracellular receptors). They may also function independently of a cell (e.g., clot formation). Receptors within the cell membrane allow a cell to communicate with the space outside of its boundaries (i.e., signaling) as well as to function in the transport of molecules and ions into and out of the cell.
  • a ligand is a binding partner for a specific receptor or family of receptors.
  • a ligand may be the endogenous ligand for the receptor or alternatively may be a synthetic ligand for the receptor such as a drug, a drug candidate or a pharmacological tool.
  • GPCRs G-protein coupled receptors
  • the G-proteins when activated, affect a wide range of downstream effector systems both positively and negatively (e.g., ion channels, protein kinase cascades, transcription, transmigration of adhesion proteins, and the like).
  • Muscarinic receptors are members of the G-protein coupled receptors that are composed of a family of five receptor sub-types (M,, M 2 , M 3 , M 4 and M 5 ) and are activated by the neuro transmitter acetylcholine 1 . These receptors are widely distributed on multiple organs and tissues and are critical to the maintenance of central and peripheral cholinergic neurotransmission. The regional distribution of these receptor subtypes in the brain and other organs has been documented .
  • the M, subtype is located primarily in neuronal tissues such as cerebral cortex and autonomic gangia, the M 2 subtype is present mainly in the heart where it mediates cholinergically induced bradycardia, and the M 3 subtype is located predominantly on smooth muscle and salivary glands.
  • muscarinic receptors are involved in diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease 5"6 , chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome 7 , urinary incontinence 7"8 , asthma, rhinitis, spasmodic colitis, chronic cystitis, and nervous polakiurea.
  • diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease 5"6 , chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome 7 , urinary incontinence 7"8 , asthma, rhinitis, spasmodic colitis, chronic cystitis, and nervous polakiurea.
  • oxybutynin is being used for the treatment of urinary urge incontinence and dicyclomine for the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome.
  • This invention is directed to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are muscarinic receptor antagonists and are therefore useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
  • this invention provides a multibinding compound comprising of from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist and further provided that when the multibinding compound comprises 2 or 3 ligands, then only one of the ligands is 1 l-acetyl-5,1 l-dihydro-6H-pyrido[2,3b][l,4]benzodiazepin-6-one, N- methylquiniclidine, or a compound of formula:
  • n a is 0 or 1 ;
  • R c is hydrogen or alkyl
  • R d is hydrogen
  • R e is -CO 2 CR f (phenyl), wherein R f is hydrogen or hydroxy.
  • this invention provides a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
  • n a is 0 or 1 ;
  • R c is hydrogen or alkyl
  • R d is hydrogen
  • R e is -CO 2 CR f (phenyl) 2 wherein R f is hydrogen or hydroxy.
  • q is less than p in the multibinding compounds of this invention.
  • each ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from the group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) : R
  • A is an aryl or a heteroaryl ring
  • R 1 is hydrogen or alkyl
  • R 2 is selected from a group consisting of formula (i), (ii), (iii), or "Het":
  • n is an integer of from 1 to 4; n 2 is an integer of from 1 to 3;
  • V is -CH-, -0-, -S(O)n 3 - (where n 3 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or -NR 4 - (wherein R 4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl);
  • Het is a heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -OR a (where R a is hydrogen, alkyl, or acyl), or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -OR b (where R b is hydrogen or alkyl), aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • K is a bond or an alkylene group
  • K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(O) n4 - (where n 4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group;
  • B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; provided that at least one of the R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , "Het", or the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker; (2) a compound of formula (b):
  • C is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
  • R 9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 10 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • Q is a single bond or -C(O)O- such that: when Q is a bond then, Q" is a group of formula (iv):
  • E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH 2 -W- R ; ⁇ wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -O-, -S-, or -NR g - (wherein R g is hydrogen or alkyl); and R 1 ' is a group of formula (v), (vi), or "Het":
  • T and U are, independently of each other, -O- or -CH 2 -; n 5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and "Het" is heteroaryl provided that at least one of C, E, R 9 , and R 10 attaches the ligand to a linker; and when Q is -C(O)O- or -NHC(O)O- then, Q" is a group of formula (vii) or (viii):
  • r ⁇ is O or l
  • M " is a counterion
  • R 12 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 13 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • J is:
  • G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
  • n 7 is an 0 or 1, provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinclidine ring attaches the ligand to the linker then n 7 is 0; n 8 is 1 or 2; g is an integer of from 0 to 3; each R 15 is, independently of each other, hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbon
  • G" is a single bond or an alkylene group provided that at least one of the R 15 , G, and G" attaches the ligand to a linker; (4) a compound of formula (d):
  • n 9 is 1 or 2
  • n 10 is 0 or 1 provided that n 9 +n, 0 are 1 or 2
  • P is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker
  • P" is a single bond or an alkylene group
  • S is a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the P and S attaches the ligand to a linker; (5) a compound of formula (e):
  • R 16 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carbamoyl, sulfanoyl, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 20 and R 21 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or R 20 and R 21 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , and R 2 ' attaches the ligand to a linker; or (6) a compound of formula (f) :
  • R 22 is hydrogen or halo
  • R 23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl;
  • R 24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 25 and R 26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R 25 and R 26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 attaches the ligand to a linker; and each ligand, L, that is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of: (7) a compound of formula (g):
  • D is alkylene
  • D is -NR 31 R 32 , -N + (R 3 R 34 R 35 ) or -OR 32 where R 31 , R 33 , and R 34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl; and R 32 and R 35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; R 28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyan
  • R 29 and R 30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , or R 30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group; or (8) a compound of formula (h):
  • n n is an integer of from 1 to 7; n 12 is 0 to 7; F is -NR 40 -, -O-, -S-, or -CHR 41 - (wherein R 40 and R 41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl);
  • F is a covalent bond, -OR 43 , -NR 42 R 43 , or -N + R 43 R 44 R 45 wherein R 42 is hydrogen or alkyl, R 44 and R 45 are alkyl, and R 43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroa
  • R 37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and
  • R 38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of R 38 and R 43 attaches the ligand to a linker; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomers, mixture of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that at least one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist.
  • each ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of Darifenacin, Tolterodine, Oxybutynin, YM-46303, YM-58790, 5-(2- isopropylimidazol-l-yl)-3,3-diphenyl-2(3H)furanone which is linked to a linker at the 4-position of imidazole ring, 3,3-diphenyl-2(3H)furanone which is linked to a linker at the 5-position of the furanone ring (disclosed in J Med.
  • each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
  • Y a and Y b at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -O-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O
  • this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands wherein each of said ligands comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • this invention provides a method of treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands, comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • this invention provides methods for preparing a multibinding compound of Formula (I).
  • this invention is directed to general synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
  • the diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a ligand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and ligand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage.
  • the library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarization.
  • the library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand, different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
  • This invention is also directed to libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
  • These libraries are prepared via the methods described above and permit the rapid and efficient evaluation of what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a ligand or a class of ligands targeting a muscarinic receptor.
  • this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
  • each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
  • each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • the preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b). Sequential addition is preferred when a mixture of different ligands is employed to ensure heterodimeric or multimeric compounds are prepared. Concurrent addition of the ligands occurs when at least a portion of the multimer comounds prepared are homomultimeric compounds.
  • the assay protocols recited in (d) can be conducted on the multimeric ligand compound library produced in (c) above, or preferably, each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
  • this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
  • each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising: (a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
  • each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
  • the library of linkers employed in either the methods or the library aspects of this invention is selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers.
  • each of the linkers in the linker library may comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups. Such linker lengths can preferably range from about 2 to 100A.
  • the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands in order to provide for a range of orientations of said ligand on said multimeric ligand compounds.
  • reactive functionality includes, by way of example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, and precursors thereof. It is understood, of course, that the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
  • the multimeric ligand compound is homomeric (i.e.. each of the ligands is the same, although it may be attached at different points) or heterodimeric (i.e., at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligands).
  • this invention provides for an interative process for rationally evaluating what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a class of multimeric compounds or ligands targeting a muscarinic receptor.
  • this method aspect is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
  • steps (e) and (f) are repeated at least two times, more preferably at from 2-50 times, even more preferably from 3 to 50 times, and still more preferably at least 5-50 times.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 2 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 3 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising >4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • This invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are muscarinic receptor antagonists, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods for treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in mammals.
  • alkyl refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, rc-propyl, /so-propyl, rc-butyl, iso- butyl, n-hexyl, «-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
  • substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-
  • substituted alkyl also includes an alkyl chain where in one or more of the carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom such as -O-, -S(O)n- (where n is 0 to 2), -NR- (where R is hydrogen or alkyl).
  • a heteroatom such as -O-, -S(O)n- (where n is 0 to 2), -NR- (where R is hydrogen or alkyl).
  • R is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • This term is exemplified by groups such as hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, 2-aminoethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-methylaminoethyl, 3- dimethylaminopropyl, 2-sulfonamidoethyl, 2-carboxyethyl, and the like.
  • alkylene refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • substituted alkylene refers to an alkylene group, as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino.
  • substituted alkylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group.
  • fused groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures.
  • alkaryl refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and - substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • alkoxy refers to the groups alkyl-O-, alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyl-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • Preferred alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, rt-propoxy, wo-propoxy, /7-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, «-pentoxy, «-hexoxy, 1 ,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • substituted alkoxy refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • haloalkoxy refers to the groups alkyl-O- wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group have been substituted with a halo group and include, by way of examples, groups such as trifluoromethoxy, and the like.
  • alkylalkoxy refers to the groups -alkylene-O-alkyl, alkylene-O-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-O-alkyl, and substituted alkylene- O-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl. substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein.
  • Preferred alkylalkoxy groups are alkylene-O-alkyl and include, by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH 2 OCH 3 ), ethylenemethoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 ), tt-propylene-z ' so-propoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH(CH 3 ) 2 ), methylene-t-butoxy (-CH 2 -O-C(CH 3 ) 3 ), and the like.
  • alkylthioalkoxy refers to the group -alkylene-S-alkyl, alkylene-S-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-S-alkyl and substituted alkylene- S-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein.
  • Preferred alkylthioalkoxy groups are alkylene-S- alkyl and include, by way of example, methylenethiomethoxy (-CH 2 SCH 3 ), ethylenethiomethoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 ), tt-propylene-z ' so-thiopropoxy
  • alkenyl refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1 -6 sites of vinyl unsaturation.
  • substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino
  • alkenylene refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation.
  • substituted alkenylene refers to an alkenylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamin
  • substituted alkenylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkenylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkenylene group.
  • alkynyl refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH), and the like.
  • substituted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxya
  • alkynylene refers to a diradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynylene groups include ethynylene (-C ⁇ C-), propargylene (-CH 2 C ⁇ C-), and the like.
  • substituted alkynylene refers to an alkynylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy.
  • thioheteroaryloxy thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl.
  • acyl refers to the groups HC(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-. substituted alkyl - C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic- C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acylamino or “aminocarbonyl” refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino) wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyl refers to the group -NRC(0)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyloxy or “alkoxycarbonylamino” refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acyloxy refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl- C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)0-, aryl-C(O)O-, heteroaryl-C(O)O-, and heterocyclic-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aryl refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryl
  • aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • arylene refers to the diradical derived from aryl (including substituted aryl) as defined above and is exemplified by 1 ,2-phenylene, 1,3- phenylene, 1 ,4-phenylene, 1 ,2-naphthylene and the like.
  • amino refers to the group -NH 2 .
  • substituted amino refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic provided that both R's are not hydrogen.
  • carboxyalkyl or "alkoxycarbonyl” refers to the groups "-C(O)O-alkyl", “-C(O)O-substituted alkyl", “-C(O)O-cycloalkyl", “-C(O)O- substituted cycloalkyl", “-C(O)O-alkenyl”, “-C(O)O-substituted alkenyl", “-C(O)O-alkynyl” and "-C(O)O-substituted alkynyl” where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl and substituted alkynyl alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkyl refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl. azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation.
  • suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl, and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkenyl refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido.
  • halo or halogen refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy
  • Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl).
  • Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
  • heteroarylkyl refers to the groups -alkylene-heteroaryl where alkylene and heteroaryl are defined herein. Such heteroaralkyl groups are exemplified by pyridylmethyl, pyridylethyl, indolylmethyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-O-.
  • heteroarylene refers to the diradical group derived from heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl), as defined above, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-pyridylene, 2,4-pyridiylene, 1 ,2-quinolinylene, 1 ,8-quinolinylene, 1 ,4-benzofuranylene, 2,5-pyridnylene, 2,5-indolenyl, and the like.
  • heterocycle or “heterocyclic” or refers to a monoradical saturated unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring.
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro
  • nitrogen heteroaryls and heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, thiophene, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, morpholine, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothioph
  • heterocyclooxy refers to the group heterocyclic-O-.
  • thioheterocyclooxy refers to the group heterocyclic-S-.
  • heterocyclene refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-morpholino, 2, 5 -morpholino and the like.
  • Heterocycloamino means a saturated monovalent cyclic group of 4 to 8 ring atoms, wherein at least one ring atom is N and optionally contains one or two additional ring heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of N, O, or S(O)n (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), the remaining ring atoms being C, where one or two C atoms may optionally be replaced by a carbonyl group.
  • the heterocycloamino ring may be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring, and it may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents, preferably one or two substituents, selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, halo, cyano, acyl, amino, substituted amino, acylamino, -OR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, acyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl), or -S(O)nR [where n is an integer from 0 to 2 and R is hydrogen (provided that n is 0), alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, amino, heterocyclo, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl]. More specifically the term hetero
  • oxyacylamino or “aminocarbonyloxy” refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • spiro-attached cycloalkyl group refers to a cycloalkyl group attached to another ring via one carbon atom common to both rings.
  • thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • thioalkoxy or "alkylthio” refers to the group -S-alkyl.
  • substituted thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • thioaryloxy refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
  • heteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible.
  • the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salt refers to salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the multibinding compounds of this invention and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. In many cases, the multibinding compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
  • Salts derived from inorganic bases include by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts.
  • Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, substituted
  • amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group.
  • suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(/so-propyl) amine, tri( ⁇ -propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, Iysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like.
  • carboxylic acid derivatives would be useful in the practice of this invention, for example, carboxylic acid amides, including carboxamides, lower alkyl carboxamides, dialkyl carboxamides,
  • Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, / oluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable cation refers to the cation of a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
  • library refers to at least 3, preferably from 10 2 to 10° and more preferably from 10 2 to 10 4 multimeric compounds. Preferably, these compounds are prepared as a multiplicity of compounds in a single solution or reaction mixture which permits facile synthesis thereof.
  • the library of multimeric compounds can be directly assayed for multibinding properties.
  • each member of the library of multimeric compounds is first isolated and, optionally, characterized. This member is then assayed for multibinding properties.
  • selection refers to a set of multimeric compounds which are prepared either sequentially or concurrently (e.g., combinatorially).
  • the collection comprises at least 2 members; preferably from 2 to 10 9 members and still more preferably from 10 to 10 4 members.
  • multimeric compound refers to compounds comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently connected through at least one linker which compounds may or may not possess multibinding properties (as defined herein).
  • pseudohalide refers to functional groups which react in displacement reactions in a manner similar to a halogen. Such functional groups include, by way of example, mesyl, tosyl, azido and cyano groups.
  • protecting group refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl groups of the compounds (including intermediates thereof) prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl group.
  • removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substituents such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t-butyl- diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • Preferred removable thiol blocking groups include disulfide groups, acyl groups, benzyl groups, and the like.
  • Preferred removable amino blocking groups include conventional substituents such as t-butyoxycarbonyl (t-BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), fluorenylmethoxy-carbonyl (FMOC), allyloxycarbonyl (ALOC), and the like which can be removed by conventional conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • ligand denotes a compound that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist.
  • the specific region or regions of the ligand that is (are) recognized by the receptor is designated as the "ligand domain".
  • a ligand may be either capable of binding to the receptor by itself, or may require the presence of one or more non-ligand components for binding (e.g., Ca +2 , Mg "2 or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites). Examples of ligands useful in this invention are described herein.
  • ligand structure that are not essential for specific molecular recognition and binding activity may be varied substantially, replaced or substituted with unrelated structures (for example, with ancillary groups as defined below) and, in some cases, omitted entirely without affecting the binding interaction.
  • the primary requirement for a ligand is that it has a ligand domain as defined above.
  • ligand is not intended to be limited to compounds known to be useful in binding to muscarinic receptor (e.g., known drugs).
  • ligand can equally apply to a molecule that is not normally associated with receptor binding properties.
  • ligands that exhibit marginal activity or lack useful activity as monomers can be highly active as multivalent compounds because of the benefits conferred by multi valency.
  • multibinding compound or agent refers to a compound that is capable of multivalency, as defined below, and which has 2-10 ligands covalently bound to one or more linkers which may be the same or different. Multibinding compounds provide a biological and/or therapeutic effect greater than the aggregate of unlinked ligands equivalent thereto which are made available for binding. That is to say that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the ligands attached to the multibinding compound is greater than that achieved by the same amount of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding sites (receptors).
  • the phrase "increased biological or therapeutic effect” includes, for example: increased affinity, increased selectivity for target, increased specificity for target, increased potency, increased efficacy, decreased toxicity, improved duration of activity or action, decreased side effects, increased therapeutic index, improved bioavailibity, improved pharmacokinetics, improved activity spectrum, and the like.
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention will exhibit at least one and preferably more than one of the above-mentioned affects.
  • the term "univalency” as used herein refers to a single binding interaction between one ligand as defined herein with one ligand binding site as defined herein. It should be noted that a compound having multiple copies of a ligand (or ligands) exhibit univalency when only one ligand is interacting with a ligand binding site. Examples of univalent interactions are depicted below.
  • multivalency refers to the concurrent binding of from 2 to 10 linked ligands (which may be the same or different) and two or more corresponding receptors (ligand binding sites) on one or more receptors which may be the same or different.
  • potency refers to the minimum concentration at which a ligand is able to achieve a desirable biological or therapeutic effect.
  • the potency of a ligand is typically proportional to its affinity for its ligand binding site. In some cases, the potency may be non-linearly correlated with its affinity.
  • the dose-response curve of each is determined under identical test conditions (e.g.. in an in vitro or in vivo assay, in an appropriate animal model). The finding that the multbinding agent produces an equivalent biological or therapeutic effect at a lower concentration than the aggregate unlinked ligand is indicative of enhanced potency.
  • selectivity is a measure of the binding preferences of a ligand for different ligand binding sites (receptors).
  • the selectivity of a ligand with respect to its target ligand binding site relative to another ligand binding site is given by the ratio of the respective values of K d (i.e., the dissociation constants for each ligand-receptor complex) or. in cases where a biological effect is observed below the K d , the ratio of the respective EC 50 's (i.e., the concentrations that produce 50% of the maximum response for the ligand interacting with the two distinct ligand binding sites (receptors)).
  • ligand binding site denotes the site on the muscarinic receptor that recognizes a ligand domain and provides a binding partner for the ligand.
  • the ligand binding site may be defined by monomeric or multimeric structures. This interaction may be capable of producing a unique biological effect, for example, agonism, antagonism, modulatory effects, may maintain an ongoing biological event, and the like.
  • the ligand binding sites of the receptor that participate in biological multivalent binding interactions are constrained to varying degrees by their intra- and inter-molecular associations (e.g., such macromolecular structures may be covalently joined to a single structure, noncovalently associated in a multimeric structure, embedded in a membrane or polymeric matrix, and so on) and therefore have less translational and rotational freedom than if the same structures were present as monomers in solution.
  • the terms “agonism” and “antagonism” are well known in the art.
  • modulatory effect refers to the ability of the ligand to change the activity of an agonist or antagonist through binding to a ligand binding site.
  • the term “allosteric modulator” as used herein denotes a compound that can regulate the activity of a muscarinic receptor.
  • the allosteric modulator can regulate the activity of a muscarinic receptor in several ways i.e., by increasing the affinity of a muscarinic receptor for its antagonists (see., Nedoma, J. S. et al, Synoptic Transmitters and Receptors (S. Tucek, ed.) Academia. Prague/Wiley, Chichester, 1987, 108-112; and Tucek, S. et al., Mol. Pharmacol. 1990, 38:674-680; Dong,
  • gallamine inhibits the binding of [3H]-(-)-N- methylscopolamine and other specific ligands to muscarinic receptors (see., Fryer, A.D and El-Fakahany, E.D., 1998, Membrane Biochem., 8, 122; and Jacoby, E.E., et al. 1993, J. Clin. Invest., 91, 1314).
  • inert organic solvent or “inert organic solvent” means a solvent which is inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith including, by way of example only, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, methylene chloride, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, acetone, methylethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, t-butanol, dioxane, pyridine, and the like.
  • the solvents used in the reactions described herein are inert solvents.
  • treatment refers to any treatment of a pathologic condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and includes: (i) preventing the pathologic condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition but has not yet been diagnosed with the condition and, accordingly, the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the disease condition;
  • pathologic condition which is modulated by treatment with a ligand covers all disease states (i.e., pathologic conditions) which are generally acknowledged in the art to be usefully treated with a ligand for the muscarinic receptors in general, and those disease states which have been found to be usefully treated by a specific multibinding compound of our invention.
  • disease states include, by way of example only, the treatment of a mammal afflicted with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
  • therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount of multibinding compound which is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined above, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • the therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • linker identified where appropriate by the symbol 'X' refers to a group or groups that covalently attaches from 2 to 10 ligands (as identified above) in a manner that provides for a compound capable of multivalency.
  • the linker is a ligand-orienting entity that permits attachment of multiple copies of a ligand (which may be the same or different) thereto.
  • the linker may itself be biologically active.
  • the linker can be either a chiral or achiral molecule.
  • linker does not, however, extend to cover solid inert supports such as beads, glass particles, fibers, and the like.
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention can be attached to a solid support if desired.
  • such attachment to solid supports can be made for use in separation and purification processes and similar applications.
  • the extent to which multivalent binding is realized depends upon the efficiency with which the linker or linkers that joins the ligands presents these ligands to the array of available ligand binding sites. Beyond presenting these ligands for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites, the linker or linkers spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker or linkers.
  • the structural features of the linker (valency, geometry, orientation, size, flexibility, chemical composition, etc.) are features of multibinding agents that play an important role in determining their activities.
  • the linkers used in this invention are selected to allow multivalent binding of ligands to the ligand binding sites of a muscarinic receptor, whether such sites are located interiorly, both interiorly and on the periphery of the enzyme structure, or at any intermediate position thereof.
  • Pro-drugs means any compound which releases an active parent drug according to Formula (I) in vivo when such prodrug is administered to a mammalian subject.
  • Prodrugs of a compound of Formula (I) are prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound of Formula (I) in such a way that the modifications may be cleaved in vivo to release the parent compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds of Formula (I) wherein a hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group in compound (I) is bonded to any group that may be cleaved in vivo to regenerate the free hydroxyl, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to esters (e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives), carbamates (e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl) of hydroxy functional groups in compounds of Formula (I), and the like.
  • esters e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives
  • carbamates e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl
  • a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein both the ligands are muscarinic receptor antagonists and are selected from the group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) :
  • A is a phenyl or a pyridine ring
  • R 1 is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl, more preferably hydrogen;
  • R 2 is selected from a group consisting of (i), (ii), (iii), or "Het":
  • n is 3 or 4; n 2 is 1 or 2;
  • V is -CH- or -NR 4 - (wherein R 4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl), preferably -CH-;
  • Het is a heteroaryl ring, preferably pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, or imidazolyl which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
  • R 3 is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably hydrogen or methyl, more preferably hydrogen;
  • R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, methyl, phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxy, or amino, benzyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxy, or amino or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, more preferably hydrogen or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, nitro, hydroxy, or amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, most preferably R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 are hydrogen or one of R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 attaches the ligand to a linker;
  • K is a bond or an alkylene group, preferably a single bond or a methylene group
  • K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(O) n4 - (where n 4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group, preferably a single bond or a methylene group;
  • B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably B is a group selected from a group consisting of:
  • n 22 is 0 or 1 ;
  • R 42 and R 43 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aralkyl, or heterocyclylalkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 44 is alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl; and W b is -N(O)n 23 or -N + -R 45 where n 23 is 0 or 1 , and R 45 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; provided that one of the R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker.
  • R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are either hydrogen or one of R 6 , R 7 and R 8 optionally attaches the ligand to a linker and the others are hydrogen; K and K" are bond; and B is: (a) pyrrolidine, piperidine, or hexahydroazepine optionally atttaching the ligand to a linker, preferably piperidin-4-yl wherein the nitrogen at the 1 position optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
  • quinuclidine, l-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, or l-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl optionally attaching the ligand to a linker wherein a bridge head carbon atom or a carbon atom adjacent thereto is the binding position with the oxygen atom; preferably quinuclidin-3-yl, quinuclidin-4-yl wherein the nitrogen optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; or
  • C is an aryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker
  • R 9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, alkyl substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 10 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and when Q is a single bond then Q" is a group of formula (iv):
  • E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH 2 -W- R" wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -O-, -S-, or -NR a - wherein R a is hydrogen or alkyl; and R" is a group of formula (v), (vi) or "Het":
  • T and U are independently of each other -O- or -CH 2 -; n 5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and
  • Het is heteroaryl; and when Q is -NHC(O)O- then Q" is a group of formula (viii)
  • n 6 is 0 or 1 ;
  • R 13 is alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: when Q is a bond then: R 9 is aminocarbonyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; C and R 10 are phenyl;
  • E is -CH 2 -W-R" wherein W is -CH 2 - and R" is a group of formula (v) or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 9 is hydrogen; C and R'° are phenyl; and Q" is a group of formula (viii)
  • n ⁇ is 0 and R 14 is hydrogen, alkyl. or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or
  • G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
  • n 7 is an 0 or 1 provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinclidine ring attaches the ligand to a linker then n 7 is 0; n 8 is 2; g is an integer of from 0 or 1 ;
  • R 15 is hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino. or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, or hydroxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • G is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or cycloalkyl which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably phenyl, pyridin-4-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-2-yl, thiophen-2-yl, thiophen-3-yl, furan-2-yl, 4-chlorophenyl, cyclohexyl, 2-, 3-, or 4- fluorophenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4-methylphenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4-nitrophenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4- aminophenyl, 3, 4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4,5 -trimethoxyphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 24- isopropylphenyl, 3-ethylaminophenyl, 2-methylaminophenyl, 3- dimethylaminophenyl, 4-methoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-thiolphenyl, 4- methylthioph
  • G" is a single bond; or (4) a compound of formula (e) :
  • R 16 is alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker, more preferably hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
  • R 20 and R 21 are. independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker; or R 20 and R 21 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker.
  • R 16 is methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker
  • R 17 is either meta or para to the -OR 16 group and is hydrogen, hydroxy, or methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
  • R 18 is hydrogen
  • R 19 is hydrogen or hydroxy, preferably hydrogen; and R 20 and R 21 are N,N-(isopropyl)amino. N-methyl-N-tert-butylamino, 2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidino, N-methyl-N-adamantylamino which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, or one of R 20 and R 21 is hydrogen or alkyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably N,N-(isopropyl)amino, N- methyl-N-tert-butylamino, or one of R 20 and R 21 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or (5) a compound of formula (f):
  • R 22 is hydrogen or halo
  • R 23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl, preferably cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, adamantyl, pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl, piperidin-1-ylmethyl, piperazin-1 -ylmethyl wherein the nitrogen at the 4-position of the piperazine ring is optionally substituted with a substituent selected from fluoro, hydroxy, nitro.
  • R 24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, fluoro or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 25 and R 26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R 25 and R 26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, phenylethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker.
  • R 22 is hydrogen or fluoro, preferably hydrogen
  • R 23 is cyclohexyl
  • R 24 is hydroxy or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker
  • R 25 and R 26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker.
  • Another more preferred group of compounds is that wherein one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonists selected from the groups (A)(1) to (A)(5) described above, and the other is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor said allosteric modulator is selected from the group consisting of: (6) a compound of formula (g):
  • D" is alkylene, preferably -(CH 2 )n 43 - where n 43 is an integer of from 1-10. more preferably 2-8;
  • D is -NR 31 R 32 , -N + (R 33 R 34 R 35 )M " or -OR 32 where R 31 , R 33 , and R 34 are. independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl, and R 32 and R 35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably R 3 ', R 33 , and R 34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or methyl, and R 32 and R 33 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy. carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino.
  • R 28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
  • R 29 and R 30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , or R 30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group.
  • R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , and R 30 are hydrogen; or
  • F is -NR 40 -, -O-, -S-, or -CHR 41 - wherein R 40 and R 41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl;
  • F is a covalent bond, -OR 43 , -NR 4 R 43 wherein R 42 is hydrogen or alkyl, or N + (R 43 R 44 R 45 ) wherein R 44 and R 45 are alkyl, and R 43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
  • R 36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, hetero
  • R 37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and R 38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, or alkoxy.
  • R 36 and R 38 are hydrogen.
  • R 37 is ortho to the -(CHR 38 )- group and is hydrogen or alkoxy, preferably methoxy;
  • F is -O-, -NH-, or -N(CH 3 )-;
  • F is methylamino, dimethylamino wherein the nitrogen atom is attached to a linker.
  • linker, X in the bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
  • the starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA), Bachem (Torrance, California, USA),
  • Emka-Chemie, or Sigma are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-15 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers. 1989), Organic Reactions. Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991), March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition), and Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989).
  • the starting materials and the intermediates of the reaction may be isolated and purified if desired using conventional techniques, including but not limited to filtration, distillation, crystallization, chromatography, and the like. Such materials may be characterized using conventional means, including physical constants and spectral data.
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared by covalently attaching the ligands, L, to a linker, X, as shown in Scheme I below.
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared, as shown above, by covalently attaching the ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist or a muscarinic receptor modulator to a linker, X, where FG 1 and FG 2 represent a functional group such as halo, amino, hydroxy, thio, aldehyde, ketone, carboxy, carboxy derivatives such as acid halide, ester, amido, and the like.
  • the ligands are covalently attached to the linker using conventional chemical techniques providing for covalent linkage of the ligand to the linker. Reaction chemistries resulting in such linkages are well known in the art and involve the use of complementary functional groups on the linker and ligand as shown in Table I below.
  • First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage carboxyl amine amide sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide ⁇ -hydroxyamine amine alkyl/aryl halide alkylamine hydroxyl carboxyl ester
  • activating agents such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • a compound selected for use as a ligand will have at least one functional group, such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like, which allows the compound to be readily coupled to the linker.
  • a functional group such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like.
  • Compounds having such functionality are either known in the art or can be prepared by routine modification of known compounds using conventional reagents and procedures.
  • the patents and publications set forth below provide numerous examples of suitably functionalized muscarinic receptor antagonist, allosteric modulators and intermediates thereof which may be used as ligands in this invention.
  • A is a phenyl or pyridine ring and other groups are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 747 355; Naito. R. et al, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1998, 46(8). 1286.
  • ligands include Darifenacin and the derivatives thereof.
  • n 6 , J, R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in U.S. Patent No. 3,505,337, EP 418 716, Drugs of the Future, 1997, 22(2) 135, EP 603229, PCT Application No. WO 93/06098, Naito, R et al, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1998, 46(8), 1274, Ninomiya K et al, Tetrahedron, 1974, 30, 2251 and PCT Application No. WO 92/06958.
  • Such ligands include Tiotropium, Ipratropium, Revatropate, Atropine, YM-58790, and the derivatives thereof.
  • n 8 , R 15 , G, G', and G" are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 801 067.
  • Such ligands include YM-53705, and the derivatives thereof.
  • n 9 , n 10 , S, P and P" are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in JP 258 250;
  • R 16 -R 21 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 325 571 and Drugs of the Future, 1997, 22(7), 733.
  • ligands include Tolterodine and the derivatives thereof.
  • R 22 - 26 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 251 126.
  • ligands include Oxybutynin and the derivatives thereof.
  • Such ligands include allosteric modulator W-84 and derivatives thereof.
  • n u , n 12 , F, F", and R 36 -R 39 are as defined above can be prepared by the procedures well known in the art e.g., Quaglia, W., et al., IL FARMACO, 46(3), 417-434, (1991); Melchiorre, C, et al., J. Med. Chem., 32, 79-84, (1989); Minarini, A., et al., IL FARMACO, 46(10), 1167-1178, (1991); Alvarez, M., et al., J. Med. Chem., 30, 1186-1193 (1987); and Melchiorre, C, et al, J. Med. Chem., 30, 201- 204, (1987).
  • reaction of an amine of formula 1 or an isocycante of formula 2 with a heterocycloamino group of formula 3 where PG is a suitable amino protecting group (such as tert-butoxycarbonyl, benzyl, and the like) gives a compound of formula (a).
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of a base such as sodium hydride, sodium methoxide, and the like.
  • Suitable solvents include inert organic organic solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, and the like.
  • Amines and isocyantes of formula 1 and 2 are commercially available or can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example, 2-biphenylisocyanate and 2-aminobiphenyl are commercially available.
  • Compound (a) is then converted to a bivalent multibinding compound of
  • Formula (I) by first removing the protecting group on the nitrogen and then reacting it with a linker of formula 5.
  • the nature of the FG 2 group depends on the type of linker group desired. For example, if X is an alkylene chain then FG 2 would preferably be halide. If the attachement of (a) to the linker is via an amido group then FG 2 would preferably be a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid derivative such as acid chloride, ester, and the like.
  • Compounds of formula 5 are commercially available or they can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example.
  • Suitable solvents include inert organic organic solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, and the like.
  • a compound of Formula (I) can be prepared as shown in Method (b) above.
  • 2 equivalents of a heterocycloamino group of formula 3 is reacted with one equivalent of a linker of formula 5 as described previously to give a dihydroxy compound of formula 6 which is then converted to a compound of Formula (I) by reacting it with an amine I or an isocyanate of formula 2 as described in method (a) above.
  • a 2-phenylethylamine of formula 7 is condensed with benzoic acid to give an amide of formula 8.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of a coupling agent such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. and the like. Cyclization of 8 followed by hydrogenation of the resulting imine 9 provides a tetrahydroisoquinoline of formula 10.
  • Reaction of K) with 4-nitrophenyl- chloro formate provides a carbamate of formula H which is then reacted with a hydroxyamine of formula 12 . to give a compound of formula (c).
  • Treatment of 2 equivalents of compound (c) with one equivalent of formula 5 provides a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I).
  • Method (d) illustrates synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) with a different point of attachement to the linker.
  • Method (e) below illustrate synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the one of the ligand is selected from a a muscarinic receptor antagonist ((selected from compound of formula (a)) and the other is a modulator of a muscarinic receptor ((selected from a compound of formula (g)).
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the one of the ligands is selected from a compound of formula (a) (a muscarinic receptor antagonist) and the other is selected from a compound of formula (g) (a modulator of a muscarinic receptor) can be prepared by first reacting one equivivalent of a compound of (g) where D is -NR 31 R 32 (where R 3 ' and R 32 are as defined above) with a linking compound of formula 5 to give a compound of formula 13. Compound 13 is then reacted with a compound of formula (a) to give a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I).
  • a compound of formula (g) can be prepared from commercially available phthalimides. For example, a compound of formula (g) where D" is propyl and D is dimethylamino group can be prepared by reacting commercially available N-(3-bromopropyl)phthalimide with dimethylamine.
  • the linker is attached to the ligand at a position that retains ligand domain- ligand binding site interaction and specifically which permits the ligand domain of the ligand to orient itself to bind to the ligand binding site. Such positions and synthetic protocols for linkage are well known in the art.
  • the term linker embraces everything that is not considered to be part of the ligand.
  • the relative orientation in which the ligand domains are displayed derives from the particular point or points of attachment of the ligands to the linker, and on the framework geometry.
  • the determination of where acceptable substitutions can be made on a ligand is typically based on prior knowledge of structure-activity relationships (SAR) of the ligand and/or congeners and/or structural information about ligand-receptor complexes (e.g.. X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like).
  • SAR structure-activity relationships
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • the linker when covalently attached to multiple copies of the ligands, provides a biocompatible, substantially non-immunogenic multibinding compound.
  • the biological activity of the multibinding compound is highly sensitive to the valency, geometry, composition, size, flexibility or rigidity, etc. of the linker and, in turn, on the overall structure of the multibinding compound, as well as the presence or absence of anionic or cationic charge, the relative hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity of the linker, and the like on the linker. Accordingly, the linker is preferably chosen to maximize the biological activity of the multibinding compound.
  • the linker may be chosen to enhance the biological activity of the molecule.
  • the linker may be chosen from any organic molecule construct that orients two or more ligands to their ligand binding sites to permit multivalency.
  • the linker can be considered as a "framework" on which the ligands are arranged in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding compound.
  • different orientations can be achieved by including in the framework groups containing mono- or polycyclic groups, including aryl and/or heteroaryl groups, or structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (alkenyl, alkenylene, alkynyl or alkynylene groups).
  • Other groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species.
  • rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.).
  • the ring is a six or ten member ring.
  • the ring is an aromatic ring such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
  • hydrophobic/hydrophilic characteristics of the linker as well as the presence or absence of charged moieties can readily be controlled by the skilled artisan.
  • hydrophobic nature of a linker derived from hexamethylene diamine (H 2 N(CH 2 ) 6 NH 2 ) or related polyamines can be modified to be substantially more hydrophilic by replacing the alkylene group with a poly(oxyalkylene) group such as found in the commercially available "Jeffamines".
  • frameworks can be designed to provide preferred orientations of the ligands.
  • Such frameworks may be represented by using an array of dots (as shown below) wherein each dot may potentially be an atom, such as C, O, N, S, P, H, F, Cl, Br, and F or the dot may alternatively indicate the absence of an atom at that position.
  • the framework is illustrated as a two dimensional array in the following diagram, although clearly the framework is a three dimensional array in practice:
  • Each dot is either an atom, chosen from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or halogen, or the dot represents a point in space (i.e., an absence of an atom).
  • the ligands namely, C, O, N, S and P.
  • Atoms can be connected to each other via bonds (single, double or triple bonds with acceptable resonance and tautomeric forms), with regard to the usual constraints of chemical bonding.
  • Ligands may be attached to the framework via single, double or triple bonds (with chemically acceptable tautomeric and resonance forms).
  • Multiple ligand groups (2 to 10) can be attached to the framework such that the minimal, shortest path distance between adjacent ligand groups does not exceed 100 atoms.
  • the linker connections to the ligand is selected such that the maximum spatial distance between two adjacent ligands is no more than 100A.
  • An example of a linker as presented by the grid is shown below for a biphenyl construct.
  • Nodes (1,2) and (9,4) are attachment points. Hydrogen atoms are affixed to nodes (2,4), (4,4), (4,0), (2,0), (7,4), (10,2) and (7,0).
  • Nodes (5,2) and (6,2) are connected by a single bond.
  • the carbon atoms present are connected by either a single or double bonds, taking into consideration the principle of resonance and/or tautomerism.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a useful strategy for determining an optimal framework display orientation for ligand domains.
  • Various other strategies are known to those skilled in the art of molecular design and can be used for preparing compounds of this invention.
  • display vectors around similar central core structures such as a phenyl structure (Panel A) and a cyclohexane structure (Panel B) can be varied, as can the spacing of the ligand domain from the core structure (i.e., the length of the attaching moiety).
  • core structures other than those shown here can be used for determining the optimal framework display orientation of the ligands.
  • the process may require the use of multiple copies of the same central core structure or combinations of different types of display cores.
  • the above-described process can be extended to trimers ( Figure 3) and compound of higher valency. ( Figure 4)
  • Assays of each of the individual compounds of a collection generated as described above will lead to a subset of compounds with the desired enhanced activities (e.g., potency, selectivity, etc.).
  • the analysis of this subset using a technique such as Ensemble Molecular Dynamics will provide a framework orientation that favors the properties desired.
  • a wide diversity of linkers is commercially available (see, e.g., Available Chemical Directory (ACD)). Many of the linkers that are suitable for use in this invention fall into this category. Other can be readily synthesized by methods well known in the art and/or are described below.
  • the physical properties of the linker can be optimized by varying the chemical composition thereof.
  • the composition of the linker can be varied in numerous ways to achieve the desired physical properties for the multibinding compound.
  • linkers include aliphatic moieties, aromatic moieties, steroidal moieties, peptides, and the like. Specific examples are peptides or polyamides, hydrocarbons, aromatic groups, ethers, lipids, cationic or anionic groups, or a combination thereof.
  • linker can be modified by the addition or insertion of ancillary groups into or onto the linker, for example, to change the solubility of the multibinding compound (in water, fats, lipids, biological fluids, etc.), hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, linker flexibility, antigenicity, stability, and the like.
  • the introduction of one or more poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) groups onto or into the linker enhances the hydrophilicity and water solubility of the multibinding compound, increases both molecular weight and molecular size and, depending on the nature of the unPEGylated linker, may increase the in vivo retention time. Further PEG may decrease antigenicity and potentially enhances the overall rigidity of the linker. Ancillary groups which enhance the water solubility/hydrophilicity of the linker and, accordingly, the resulting multibinding compounds are useful in practicing this invention.
  • PEG poly(ethylene glycol)
  • ancillary groups such as, for example, small repeating units of ethylene glycols, alcohols, polyols (e.g., glycerin, glycerol propoxylate, saccharides, including mono- , oligosaccharides, etc.), carboxylates (e.g., small repeating units of glutamic acid, acrylic acid, etc.), amines (e.g., tetraethylenepentamine), and the like) to enhance the water solubility and/or hydrophilicity of the multibinding compounds of this invention.
  • the ancillary group used to improve water solubility/hydrophilicity will be a polyether .
  • lipophilic ancillary groups within the structure of the linker to enhance the lipophilicity and/or hydrophobicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention.
  • Lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include, by way of example only, aryl and heteroaryl groups which, as above, may be either unsubstituted or substituted with other groups, but are at least substituted with a group which allows their covalent attachment to the linker.
  • Other lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include fatty acid derivatives which do not form bilayers in aqueous medium until higher concentrations are reached.
  • lipid refers to any fatty acid derivative that is capable of forming a bilayer or a micelle such that a hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients toward the bilayer while a hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Hydrophilic characteristics derive from the presence of phosphato, carboxylic, sulfato, amino, sulfhydryl, nitro and other like groups well known in the art.
  • Hydrophobicity could be conferred by the inclusion of groups that include, but are not limited to, long chain saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups of up to 20 carbon atoms and such groups substituted by one or more aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and/or heterocyclic group(s).
  • Preferred lipids are phosphglycerides and sphingolipids, representative examples of which include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyleoyl phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidyl-ethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, distearoyl-phosphatidylcholine or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine could be used.
  • lipid Other compounds lacking phosphorus, such as sphingolipid and glycosphingolipid families are also within the group designated as lipid. Additionally, the amphipathic lipids described above may be mixed with other lipids including triglycerides and sterols.
  • the flexibility of the linker can be manipulated by the inclusion of ancillary groups which are bulky and/or rigid. The presence of bulky or rigid groups can hinder free rotation about bonds in the linker or bonds between the linker and the ancillary group(s) or bonds between the linker and the functional groups.
  • Rigid groups can include, for example, those groups whose conformational lability is restrained by the presence of rings and/or multiple bonds within the group, for example, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. and heterocyclic groups.
  • Other groups which can impart rigidity include polypeptide groups such as oligo- or polyproline chains.
  • Rigidity can also be imparted electrostatically.
  • the ancillary groups are either positively or negatively charged, the similarly charged ancillary groups will force the presenter linker into a configuration affording the maximum distance between each of the like charges.
  • the energetic cost of bringing the like-charged groups closer to each other will tend to hold the linker in a configuration that maintains the separation between the like-charged ancillary groups.
  • Further ancillary groups bearing opposite charges will tend to be attracted to their oppositely charged counterparts and potentially may enter into both inter- and intramolecular ionic bonds. This non-covalent mechanism will tend to hold the linker into a conformation which allows bonding between the oppositely charged groups.
  • ancillary groups which are charged, or alternatively, bear a latent charge when deprotected, following addition to the linker, include deprotectation of a carboxyl, hydroxyl, thiol or amino group by a change in pH, oxidation, reduction or other mechanisms known to those skilled in the art which result in removal of the protecting group, is within the scope of this invention.
  • Rigidity may also be imparted by internal hydrogen bonding or by hydrophobic collapse.
  • Bulky groups can include, for example, large atoms, ions (e.g., iodine, sulfur, metal ions, etc.) or groups containing large atoms, polycyclic groups, including aromatic groups, non-aromatic groups and structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (i.e., alkenes and alkynes). Bulky groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. Species that are branched are expected to increase the rigidity of the structure more per unit molecular weight gain than are straight-chain species.
  • rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.).
  • the linker comprises one or more six-membered rings.
  • the ring is an aryl group such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
  • the appropriate selection of a linker group providing suitable orientation, restricted/unrestricted rotation, the desired degree of hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity, etc. is well within the skill of the art. Eliminating or reducing antigenicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. In certain cases, the antigenicity of a multibinding compound may be eliminated or reduced by use of groups such as, for example, poly(ethylene glycol). As explained above, the multibinding compounds described herein comprise
  • the compounds of this invention are preferably represented by the empirical Formula (L) p (X) q where L, X, p and q are as defined above. This is intended to include the several ways in which the ligands can be linked together in order to achieve the objective of multivalency, and a more detailed explanation is described below.
  • the linker may be considered as a framework to which ligands are attached.
  • the ligands can be attached at any suitable position on this framework, for example, at the termini of a linear chain or at any intermediate position.
  • the simplest and most preferred multibinding compound is a bivalent compound which can be represented as L-X-L, where each L is independently a ligand which may be the same or different and each X is independently the linker. Examples of such bivalent compounds are provided in FIG. 1 where each shaded circle represents a ligand.
  • a trivalent compound could also be represented in a linear fashion, i.e., as a sequence of repeated units L-X-L-X-L, in which L is a ligand and is the same or different at each occurrence, as can X.
  • a trimer can also be a radial multibinding compound comprising three ligands attached to a central core, and thus represented as (L) 3 X, where the linker X could include, for example, an aryl or cycloalkyl group.
  • Illustrations of trivalent and tetravalent compounds of this invention are found in FIGs 2 and 3 respectively where, again, the shaded circles represent ligands. Tetravalent compounds can be represented in a linear array, e.g.,
  • X and L are as defined herein.
  • it could be represented as an alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl derivative as above with four (4) ligands attached to the core linker.
  • the same considerations apply to higher multibinding compounds of this invention containing 5-10 ligands as illustrated in FIG. 4 where, as before, the shaded circles represent ligands.
  • a preferred linker may be represented by the following formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -C(O)NR-. -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene. heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
  • -NR'-C( NR')-, -OC(0)-NR'-.
  • n 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
  • linker moiety can be optionally substituted at any atom therein by one or more alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic group.
  • the linker i.e., X, X' or X
  • the linker is selected those shown in Table II:
  • n is an integer of from 2-10
  • linker when used in combination with the term “multibinding compound” includes both a covalently contiguous single linker (e.g.. L-X-L) and multiple covalently non-contiguous linkers (L-X-L-X-L) within the multibinding compound.
  • Combinatorial Libraries The methods described above lend themselves to combinatorial approaches for identifying multimeric compounds which possess multibinding properties. Specifically, factors such as the proper juxtaposition of the individual ligands of a multibinding compound with respect to the relevant array of binding sites on a target or targets is important in optimizing the interaction of the multibinding compound with its target(s) and to maximize the biological advantage through multivalency.
  • One approach is to identify a library of candidate multibinding compounds with properties spanning the multibinding parameters that are relevant for a particular target. These parameters include: (1) the identity of ligand(s), (2) the orientation of ligands, (3) the valency of the construct, (4) linker length, (5) linker geometry, (6) linker physical properties, and (7) linker chemical functional groups.
  • ligand(s ) A single ligand or set of ligands is (are) selected for incorporation into the libraries of candidate multibinding compounds which library is directed against a particular biological target or targets, i.e., antagonism of a muscarinic receptor.
  • the only requirement for the ligands chosen is that they are capable of interacting with the selected target(s).
  • ligands may be known drugs, modified forms of known drugs, substructures of known drugs or substrates of modified forms of known drugs (which are competent to interact with the target), or other compounds.
  • Ligands are preferably chosen based on known favorable properties that may be projected to be carried over to or amplified in multibinding forms.
  • ligands which display an unfavorable property from among the previous list may obtain a more favorable property through the process of multibinding compound formation; i.e., ligands should not necessarily be excluded on such a basis.
  • a ligand that is not sufficiently potent at a particular target so as to be efficacious in a human patient may become highly potent and efficacious when presented in multibinding form.
  • a ligand that is potent and efficacious but not of utility because of a non- mechanism-related toxic side effect may have increased therapeutic index (increased potency relative to toxicity) as a multibinding compound.
  • Compounds that exhibit short in vivo half-lives may have extended half-lives as multibinding compounds.
  • Physical properties of ligands that limit their usefulness e.g. poor bioavailability due to low solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity
  • each ligand at which to attach the ligand to the linker.
  • the selected points on the ligand/linker for attachment are functionalized to contain complementary reactive functional groups. This permits probing the effects of presenting the ligands to their receptor(s) in multiple relative orientations, an important multibinding design parameter.
  • the only requirement for choosing attachment points is that attaching to at least one of these points does not abrogate activity of the ligand.
  • Such points for attachment can be identified by structural information when available. For example, inspection of a co-crystal structure of a protease inhibitor bound to its target allows one to identify one or more sites where linker attachment will not preclude the enzyme inhibitor interaction.
  • positions of attachment that do abrogate the activity of the monomeric ligand may also be advantageously included in candidate multibinding compounds in the library provided that such compounds bear at least one ligand attached in a manner which does not abrogate intrinsic activity. This selection derives from, for example, heterobivalent interactions within the context of a single target molecule.
  • a receptor antagonist ligand bound to its target receptor and then consider modifying this ligand by attaching to it a second copy of the same ligand with a linker which allows the second ligand to interact with the same receptor molecule at sites proximal to the antagonist binding site, which include elements of the receptor that are not part of the formal antagonist binding site and/or elements of the matrix surrounding the receptor such as the membrane.
  • the most favorable orientation for interaction of the second ligand molecule with the receptor/matrix may be achieved by attaching it to the linker at a position which abrogates activity of the ligand at the formal antagonist binding site.
  • Another way to consider this is that the SAR of individual ligands within the context of a multibinding structure is often different from the SAR of those same ligands in momomeric form.
  • bivalent interaction focused on bivalent interactions of dimeric compounds bearing two copies of the same ligand joined to a single linker through different attachment points, one of which may abrogate the binding/activity of the monomeric ligand. It should also be understood that bivalent advantage may also be attained with heterodimeric constructs bearing two different ligands that bind to common or different targets.
  • a 5HT 4 receptor antagonist and a bladder-selective muscarinic M 3 antagonist may be joined to a linker through attachment points which do not abrogate the binding affinity of the monomeric ligands for their respective receptor sites.
  • the dimeric compound may achieve enhanced affinity for both receptors due to favorable interactions between the 5HT 4 ligand and elements of the M 3 receptor proximal to the formal M 3 antagonist binding site and between the M 3 ligand and elements of the 5HT 4 receptor proximal to the formal 5HT 4 antagonist binding site.
  • the dimeric compound may be more potent and selective antagonist of overactive bladder and a superior therapy for urinary urge incontinence.
  • linkages that are possible at those points.
  • the most preferred types of chemical linkages are those that are compatible with the overall structure of the ligand (or protected forms of the ligand) readily and generally formed, stable and intrinsically inocuous under typical chemical and physiological conditions, and compatible with a large number of available linkers. Amide bonds, ethers, amines, carbamates, ureas, and sulfonamides are but a few examples of preferred linkages.
  • Linkers spanning relevant multibinding parameters through selection of valency. linker length, linker geometry, rigidity, physical properties, and chemical functional groups
  • linker length is typically of modest size such that they retain the desirable biodistribution properties of small molecules.
  • Linkers are chosen in a range of lengths to allow the spanning of a range of inter-ligand distances that encompass the distance preferable for a given divalent interaction.
  • the preferred distance can be estimated rather precisely from high-resolution structural information of targets, typically enzymes and soluble receptor targets.
  • high-resolution structural information is not available (such as 7TM G-protein coupled receptors)
  • preferred linker distances are 2-20 A, with more preferred linker distances of 3-12 A.
  • preferred linker distances are 20-100 A, with more preferred distances of 30-70 A.
  • Linker geometry and rigidity :
  • Linker geometry and rigidity are nominally determined by chemical composition and bonding pattern, which may be controlled and are systematically varied as another spanning function in a multibinding array. For example, linker geometry is varied by attaching two ligands to the ortho, meta, and para positions of a benzene ring, or in cis- or trans-arrangements at the 1,1- vs. 1,2- vs. 1,3- vs.
  • Linker rigidity is varied by controlling the number and relative energies of different conformational states possible for the linker.
  • a divalent compound bearing two ligands joined by 1,8-octyl linker has many more degrees of freedom, and is therefore less rigid than a compound in which the two ligands are attached to the 4,4' positions of a biphenyl linker.
  • linkers are nominally determined by the chemical constitution and bonding patterns of the linker, and linker physical properties impact the overall physical properties of the candidate multibinding compounds in which they are included.
  • a range of linker compositions is typically selected to provide a range of physical properties (hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, amphiphilicity, polarization, acidity, and basicity) in the candidate multibinding compounds.
  • the particular choice of linker physical properties is made within the context of the physical properties of the ligands they join and preferably the goal is to generate molecules with favorable PK/ADME properties.
  • linkers can be selected to avoid those that are too hydrophilic or too hydrophobic to be readily absorbed and/or distributed in vivo.
  • Linker chemical functional groups :
  • Linker chemical functional groups are selected to be compatible with the chemistry chosen to connect linkers to the ligands and to impart the range of physical properties sufficient to span initial examination of this parameter.
  • n being determined by the sum of the number of different attachment points for each ligand chosen
  • m linkers by the process outlined above
  • a library of (n )m candidate divalent multibinding compounds is prepared which spans the relevant multibinding design parameters for a particular target. For example, an array generated from two ligands, one which has two attachment points (Al, A2) and one which has three attachment points (Bl, B2, B3) joined in all possible combinations provide for at least 15 possible combinations of multibinding compounds:
  • a library of 150 candidate multibinding compounds results.
  • common chemistries are preferably used to join the reactive functionalies on the ligands with complementary reactive functionalities on the linkers.
  • the library therefore lends itself to efficient parallel synthetic methods.
  • the combinatorial library can employ solid phase chemistries well known in the art wherein the ligand and/or linker is attached to a solid support. Alternatively and preferably, the combinatorial libary is prepared in the solution phase.
  • candidate multibinding compounds are optionally purified before assaying for activity by, for example, chromatographic methods (e.g., HPLC).
  • Various methods are used to characterize the properties and activities of the candidate multibinding compounds in the library to determine which compounds possess multibinding properties. Physical constants such as solubility under various solvent conditions and logD/clogD values can be determined. A combination of NMR spectroscopy and computational methods is used to determine low-energy conformations of the candidate multibinding compounds in fluid media. The ability of the members of the library to bind to the desired target and other targets is determined by various standard methods, which include radioligand displacement assays for receptor and ion channel targets, and kinetic inhibition analysis for many enzyme targets. In vitro efficacy, such as for receptor agonists and antagonists, ion channel blockers, and antimicrobial activity, can also be determined. Pharmacological data, including oral abso ⁇ tion, everted gut penetration, other pharmacokinetic parameters and efficacy data can be determined in appropriate models. In this way, key structure-activity relationships are obtained for multibinding design parameters which are then used to direct future work.
  • the members of the library which exhibit multibinding properties can be readily determined by conventional methods. First those members which exhibit multibinding properties are identified by conventional methods as described above including conventional assays (both in vitro and in vivo).
  • each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time.
  • each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time. See, for example, Dower, et al., International Patent Application Publication No. WO 93/06121; Brenner, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 89:5181 (1992); Gallop, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,846,839; each of which are inco ⁇ orated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the structure of relevant multivalent compounds can also be determined from soluble and untagged libaries of candidate multivalent compounds by methods known in the art such as those described by Hindsgaul, et al., Canadian Patent Application No. 2,240,325 which was published on July 1 1, 1998. Such methods couple frontal affinity chromatography with mass spectroscopy to determine both the structure and relative binding affinities of candidate multibinding compounds to receptors.
  • the process set forth above for dimeric candidate multibinding compounds can, of course, be extended to trimeric candidate compounds and higher analogs thereof.
  • an optional component of the process is to ascertain one or more promising multibinding "lead” compounds as defined by particular relative ligand orientations, linker lengths, linker geometries, etc. Additional libraries can then be generated around these leads to provide for further information regarding structure to activity relationships. These arrays typically bear more focused variations in linker structure in an effort to further optimize target affinity and/or activity at the target (antagonism, partial agonism, etc.), and/or alter physical properties.
  • iterative redesign/analysis using the novel principles of multibinding design along with classical medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, and pharmacology approaches one is able to prepare and identify optimal multibinding compounds that exhibit biological advantage towards their targets and as therapeutic agents.
  • suitable divalent linkers include, by way of example only, those derived from dicarboxylic acids, disulfonylhalides, dialdehydes, diketones, dihalides, diisocyanates.diamines. diols, mixtures of carboxylic acids, sulfonylhalides, aldehydes, ketones, halides, isocyanates, amines and diols.
  • carboxylic acid, sulfonylhalide, aldehyde, ketone, halide, isocyanate, amine and diol functional group is reacted with a complementary functionality on the ligand to form a covalent linkage.
  • complementary functionality is well known in the art as illustrated in the following table:
  • First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide ⁇ -amine hydroxyamine sulfonyl halide sulfonamide carboxyl acid amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine/NaCNBH 3 amine ketone amine/NaCNBH 3 amine amine isocyanate urea
  • Exemplary linkers include the following linkers identified as X-1 through X- 418 as set forth below:
  • Representative ligands for use in this invention include, by way of example, L-l through L-8 wherein L-l is selected from a compound of formula (a) L-2 is selected from a compound of formula (b), L-3 is selected from a compound of formula (c), L-4 is selected from a compound of formula (d), L-5 is selected from a compound of formula (e), L-6 is selected from a compound of formula (f), L-7 is selected from a compound of formula (g), and L-8 is selected from a compound of formula (h) provided that at least one of the ligands is selected from ligands L-l through L-5.
  • Combinations of ligands (L) and linkers (X) per this invention include, by way example only, homo- and hetero-dimers wherein a first ligand is selected from L-l through L-5 and the second ligand and linker is selected from the following:
  • L-2/X-31 1- L-2/X-312- L-2/X-313- L-2/X-314- L-2/X-315- L-2/X-316- L-2/X-317- L-2/X-318- L-2/X-319- L-2/X-320- L-2/X-321 - L-2/X-322- -101-
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention are muscarinic receptor antagonists, in particular M 3 muscarinic receptor antagonists. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by these receptors such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
  • compositions When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of this invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described herein associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth. gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone. cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally -103- include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.001 to about 1 g, more usually about 1 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the compound of Formula (I) above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
  • the active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • This solid preformulation is then -104- subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil. sesame oil, coconut oil. or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • Step l l-Benzyl-4-piperidinol (2.09 g, 10.9 mmol) and 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (2.2 g, 10.9 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (10 ml). To this solution was added diisopropylethylamine (1.4 g, 10.9 mmol) and the resulting yellow solution was stirred at room temperature. After 3 h, aminodiphenylmethane (2 g, 10.9 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at 65 °C. After 3 h, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and stirred for an additional 12 h.
  • N-(3-bromopropyl)phthalimide (10 g, 37.3 mmol) was dissolved in dry acetonitrile (100 ml) and a solution of dimethylamine in tetrahydrofuran (56 ml, 111 mmol, 2 M) was added. The flask was fitted with a reflux condense and the solution was heated at reflux. After 22 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give a yellow oil which was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 M sodium carbonate solution saturated with sodium chloride. The organic phase was collected and washed with brine, dried over potassium carbonate, filtered and concentrated to give a yellow oil.
  • 6-(Dimethylamino)hexanol (8.80 g, 60.6 mmol) was dissolved in an anhydrous 2:1 mixture of tetrahydrofuran and dimethylformamide (150 ml) and the solution was cooled in an ice bath.
  • Sodium hydride (60% in oil, 3.23 g, 80.8 mmol) was added in portions and after 5 min. the water bath was removed.
  • 2-methoxybenzyl chloride (6.28 g, 40.4 mmol) was added. After 4 h, the reaction mixture was quenched with 1 M sodium thiosulfate and tetrahydrofuran was removed in vacuo.
  • reaction mixture was washed with ethyl acetate and the aqueous phase was basified with 3 m sodium hydroxide, followed by extraction with ether.
  • the ether layer was dried over potassium carbonate, filtered and acidified with 4 M hydrochloric acid in dioxane.
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was crystallized form ethanol/ether to give O- (2-methoxybenzyl)-6-dimethylaminohexanol as the hydrochloride salt (10.4 g, 85%).
  • 4-piperidyl-N-(2-biphenyl)-carbamate 18 (0.33 mL) (prepared by dissolving 2.96 g of 18 in anhydrous DMF to produce a total volume of 33 mL) was added and the vial is resealed and heated overnight at 72 °C in a heating block. The mixture was cooled, quenched with 5% TF A/water (0.30 mL), diluted with acetonitrile and water, filtered, and purified using preperative LC/MS [ Zeng, L; Kassel, D. B. Anal. Chem. 1998, 70. 4380-4388 and references therein] to provide the individual components. Quality and identity of the collected fractions was verified using analytical HPLC and electrospray MS.
  • N-(2-Methylaminethyl)phthalimido 23 (0.20 mL, of a 0.5 M solution, 0.10 mmol) (prepared by dissolving 168 mg of N-(2-methylaminethyl)phthalimido in, DIPEA (0.18 mL) and enough anhydrous acetonitrile to bring the solution to a total volume of 1.4 mL), and a solution of compound 22 (0.167 mL) (prepared by dissolving 673 mg of 22 in enough anhydrous acetonitrile to bring the total volume to 4 mL), and Nal (0.20 mL of a 1 M solution in anhydrous acetonitrile) were combined in a 1 dram vial charged with 1,11-dibromoundecane (0.10 mmol).
  • the —114— vial was closed with a Teflon sealed cap and the placed in a 72 °C heating block for a 21 h.
  • the mixture was cooled, quenched with 5% TF A/water (0.30 mL), diluted with acetonitrile and water, filtered, and purified using preperative LC/MS [ Zeng, L; Kassel, D. B. Anal. Chem. 1998, 70, 4380-4388 and references therein] to provide the individual components 26-28. Quality and identity of the collected fractions was verified using analytical HPLC and electrospray MS.
  • Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
  • the above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • Example 10 A tablet Formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
  • Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
  • the components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • Example 11 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components: Ingredient Weight %
  • the active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
  • Example 12 Tablets each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh
  • Capsules each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg -127- quantities.
  • Suppositories each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • Example 15 Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water.
  • the sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • Example 16 -128- A formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities.
  • a formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • the white soft paraffin is heated until molten.
  • the liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved.
  • the active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed.
  • the mixture is then cooled until solid.
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the -129- compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 1 1, 1991, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Example 19 M 3 Muscarinic Receptor In Vitro Binding Assay The M 3 muscarininc receptor binding activity of compounds of the invention was tested as follows: SF9 cell membranes containing human M 3 muscarinic receptor was obtained from NEN (Boston, MA). In 96-well microtiter plates, eight serial five-fold dilutions were prepared with the compound to be assayed; the highest concentration was typically 4 ⁇ M (4x the final concentration). To 100 ⁇ l of compound dilution was added 150 ⁇ L M 3 receptor membrane preparation in PBS/1. OmM MgCl 2 /pH 7.4. 50 ⁇ l of 3.2 nM 3H-N-methylscopolamine radioligand was added.
  • the total volume in each well was then 300 ⁇ l.
  • the filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 ⁇ l PBS.
  • the assay plate was incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking. The contents of the assay plate were then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200 ⁇ l PBS.
  • About 40 ⁇ l of scint was added to each well and then the plate was allowed to sit at room temperature for 2h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on a Packard top counter.
  • the raw data was fit to a standard 4-parameter equation given below and a value of IC50 obtained.
  • Y (a-d)/( 1 +(x/c) b ) + d where -130-
  • Rat heart tissue was typically prepared as follows. 25 ⁇ l of ice cold buffer (20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCl, at pH 7.5 with "Complete" protease inhibitor cocktail purchased from Boehringer Mannheim was added into an oakridge tube. To the tube was then added 2g of rat heart (purchased from Harlan). The contents of the tube were then transferred to a wheaton glass cylinder and homogenized using a Polytron homogenizer (setting 22, 15 seconds x2), and then transferred back to the oakridge tube, and centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1500g.
  • ice cold buffer (20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCl, at pH 7.5 with "Complete" protease inhibitor cocktail purchased from Boehringer Mannheim was added into an oakridge tube.
  • To the tube was then added 2g of rat heart (purchased from Harlan). The contents of the tube were then transferred to a wheaton glass cylinder and homogenized using
  • the supernatant was removed and then centrifuged for 20 minutes at 45000g.
  • the supernatant was removed and the pellet resuspended in 5mL buffer and transferred to a wheaton glass cylinder.
  • This material was then homogenized using a Potter type glass teflon homogenizer with 7-8 passes.
  • the material is then transferred to an oakridge tube and the total volume brought up to 25mL. This volume is then centrifuged for 20 minutes at 45000g, and the pellet resuspended in 2mL buffer using 2 passes of a teflon homogenizer, and stored at -80 degrees C until used.
  • rat -131- heart membrane (usually 12.5 ⁇ l of membrane prep in 87.5 ⁇ l of 20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCL at pH 7.5). The amount of membrane added depends in general on the results of signal optimization, and ranges from 6.25-12.5 ⁇ l.
  • 50 ⁇ l of 2.12nM 3H-N-methylscopolamine radioligand was added.
  • the total volume in each well was 200 ⁇ l.
  • the filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 ⁇ l PBS.
  • the assay plate was incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking. The contents of the assay plate were then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200ul PBS. About 40 ⁇ l of scint was added to each well and then the plate was allowed to sit at room temperature for 18h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on the Packard counter. The data was fit to the four parameter fit described above in Example 19.
  • Rat Bladder M 3 In Vitro Binding Assay Bladder was comprised of both M 2 and M 3 muscarinic receptors. The ratio was typically 4:1 M 2 :M 3 . In order to measure binding of test compounds to one of M 2 or M 3 , the other was blocked with a reversible ligand that binds selectively to that receptor. The following example illustrates the procedure for M 3 bladder binding.
  • Membranes from rat bladder were prepared in a similar fashion to that used to isolate heart membrane above. Eight serial five-fold dilutions are prepared with the compound to be assayed in compound dilution buffer (20 mM HEPES/lOOmM NaCl/1 OmM MgCl 2 /4 ⁇ M Methoctramine); the highest concentration was typically -132-
  • rat heart membrane usually 25 ⁇ l of membrane prep in 75 ⁇ l of 20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCl 2 at pH 7.5. The amount of membrane added depended in general on the results of signal optimization, and ranged from 12.5-25.
  • 50 ⁇ l of 2.12 nM 3H-N- methylscopolamine radioligand in compound dilution buffer was added. The total volume in each well was 200 ⁇ l.
  • the final concentration of Methoctramine is 2 ⁇ M.
  • the filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 ⁇ l PBS.
  • the assay plate is incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking.
  • the contents of the assay plate are then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200 ⁇ l PBS.
  • About 40 ⁇ l of scint is added to each well and then the plate is allowed to sit at room temperature for 18h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on the Packard counter, and the data was fit to the four parameter equation described in Example 19.
  • Example 22 Ex Vivo Rat Bladder Contraction Assay The ability of the test compound to inhibit cholinergically stimulated bladder contraction was tested as follows:
  • Rat Salivation Assay Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 - 300 g were anesthetized with pentobarbital (60mg/kg i.p.). Rats were placed on a heated blanket under a 20 degree incline. A swab was placed in the rat's mouth. Muscarinic antagonist or vehicle was administered i.v. via the tail vein. 5 min. later, oxotremorine
  • Example 24 In Vivo Bladder Assay Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 - 300 g were anesthetized with urethane (1.3 g/kg, i.p.), inactin (25 mg/kg, i.p.), and xylazine (4 mg, i.p.). The jugular (or femoral) vein was Isolate and ligated and a small incision was made in the vein distal to the ligation. A catheter (micro-Renathane tubing (0.014 mm ID x 0.033 mm OD) was filled with saline was nserted into the vein and secured into place with suture thread.
  • urethane 1.3 g/kg, i.p.
  • inactin 25 mg/kg, i.p.
  • xylazine 4 mg, i.p.
  • the jugular (or femoral) vein was Isolate and ligated and a small in
  • the trachea was isolated and place da small hole between two of the rings.
  • Tubing (1.57 mm ID x 2.08 mm OD) was inserted into the trachea and tied into place with suture thread. The incision was closed leaving the tubing exposed.
  • the tracheotomy was to prevent the animal from asphyxiating on his own saliva following oxotremorine administration.
  • the stomach was shaved and then cleaned with ethanol.
  • a midline sagital incision was made in the skin and muscle layers of the lower stomach.
  • the bladder was exposed and the saline filled cannula (22-gauge needle attached to a pressure transducer with PE 90 tubing) was inserted into the apex of the bladder to the most distal part of the bladder.
  • the bladder was placed back into the peritoneal cavity.
  • the bladder was emptied manually by disconnecting the cannula and allowing the contents to flow out until the bladder was approximately 1 cm in diameter.
  • the incision was closed with suture thread, first the muscle layer, then the skin in order to keep the bladder moist and warm.
  • the exposed portion of the cannula to the skin surface was sutured to hold it in place.
  • oxotremorine 0.3 mg/kg, SC, baseweight
  • a test compound or a reference standard was injected with a dose equivalent to 0.005 - 0.01 mg/kg, IV, baseweight of atropine that produces a 30-70% decrease in intraluminal pressure.
  • a high dose of atropine 0.1 mg/kg was injected, IV to establish the true 100% inhibition point.
  • oxotremorine response zero inhibition
  • measure the mean pressure beginning 1 minute and ending 2 minutes after antagonist administration If the pressure has not leveled off -135- after 1 minute, wait until it is stable and then take a 1 -minute sample of the mean.
  • measure the mean pressure beginning 1 minutes and ending 2 minutes after the high dose atropine challenge The percent inhibition by the antagonist can be determined by the ratio of the decrease from the zero to 100% values.
  • the formula is: oxotremorine mean - treatment mean * 100 oxotremorine mean - atropine mean.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Hydrogenated Pyridines (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Pyrrole Compounds (AREA)
  • Indole Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are multibinding compounds which are muscarinic receptor antagonists. The multibinding compounds of this invention containing from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers. Each ligand is, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator provided that at least one of said ligand is a muscarinic receptor antagonist. The multibinding compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.

Description

MUSCARINIC RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS:
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/088,466, filed June 8, 1998; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/092,938, filed July 15, 1998; and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/120,287, filed February 16, 1999; the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are muscarinic receptor antagonsits, pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, and methods of preparing these compounds. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by these receptors such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
References The following publications are cited in this application as superscript numbers:
1 Bonner, T. I. et al., Science (Washington D.C.) 1987, 237, 527-
532.
2 Goyal, R. K., J. Med., 1989, 321, 1022.
3 Hulme, E.C., et al., Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 1990, 30,
633. Eglen, R. M. and Hegde, S. S., Drug News Perspect. 1997, 10(8), 462-469.
5 Fisher, A., Invest. Drugs. 1997, 6(10), 1395-141 1.
Martel, A. M, et al., Drugs Future, 1997, 22(2), 135-137.
7 Graul, A. and Castaner. J.. Drugs Future, 1996, 21(11), 1 105-1108.
8 Graul, A., et al., Drugs Future. 1997, 22(7), 733-737.
All of the above publications are herein incoφorated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference in its entirety.
State of the Art
A receptor is a biological structure with one or more binding domains that reversibly complexes with one or more ligands. where that complexation has biological consequences. Receptors can exist entirely outside the cell (extracellular receptors), within the cell membrane (but presenting sections of the receptor to the extracellular milieu and cytosol), or entirely within the cell (intracellular receptors). They may also function independently of a cell (e.g., clot formation). Receptors within the cell membrane allow a cell to communicate with the space outside of its boundaries (i.e., signaling) as well as to function in the transport of molecules and ions into and out of the cell.
A ligand is a binding partner for a specific receptor or family of receptors. A ligand may be the endogenous ligand for the receptor or alternatively may be a synthetic ligand for the receptor such as a drug, a drug candidate or a pharmacological tool. The super family of seven transmembrane proteins (7-TMs), also called
G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs), represents one of the most significant classes of membrane bound receptors that communicate changes that occur outside of the cell's boundaries to its interior, triggering a cellular response when appropriate. The G-proteins, when activated, affect a wide range of downstream effector systems both positively and negatively (e.g., ion channels, protein kinase cascades, transcription, transmigration of adhesion proteins, and the like).
Muscarinic receptors are members of the G-protein coupled receptors that are composed of a family of five receptor sub-types (M,, M2, M3, M4 and M5) and are activated by the neuro transmitter acetylcholine1. These receptors are widely distributed on multiple organs and tissues and are critical to the maintenance of central and peripheral cholinergic neurotransmission. The regional distribution of these receptor subtypes in the brain and other organs has been documented . For example, the M, subtype is located primarily in neuronal tissues such as cerebral cortex and autonomic gangia, the M2 subtype is present mainly in the heart where it mediates cholinergically induced bradycardia, and the M3 subtype is located predominantly on smooth muscle and salivary glands.
It has been established that the muscarinic receptors are involved in diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease5"6, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome7, urinary incontinence7"8, asthma, rhinitis, spasmodic colitis, chronic cystitis, and nervous polakiurea. Currently, a number of compounds having muscarinic receptor antagonistic activities are being used to treat these diseases. For example, oxybutynin is being used for the treatment of urinary urge incontinence and dicyclomine for the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome.
However, these drugs have limited utility as they produce side effects such as dry mouth, blurred vision, and mydriasis. Therefore, there is a need for muscarinic receptor antagonists that will help in the treatment of the above diseases without the adverse side effects. The multibinding compounds of the present invention fulfill this need.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention is directed to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are muscarinic receptor antagonists and are therefore useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
Accordingly, in one of its composition aspects, this invention provides a multibinding compound comprising of from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist and further provided that when the multibinding compound comprises 2 or 3 ligands, then only one of the ligands is 1 l-acetyl-5,1 l-dihydro-6H-pyrido[2,3b][l,4]benzodiazepin-6-one, N- methylquiniclidine, or a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein: na is 0 or 1 ;
Rc is hydrogen or alkyl; Rd is hydrogen; and
Re is -CO2CRf (phenyl), wherein Rf is hydrogen or hydroxy. In a second aspect, this invention provides a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
(L)p(X)q (I)
wherein: each L is, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor; each X is independently a linker; p is an integer of from 2 to 10; and q is an integer of from 1 to 20, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and further provided that when the multibinding compound comprises of 2 or 3 ligands, then only one of the ligands is 1 l-acetyl-5,1 l-dihydro-6H- pyrido[2,3][l,4]benzodiazepin-6-one, N-methylquiniclidine, or a compound of formula:
alkyl ' *
Figure imgf000007_0001
Figure imgf000007_0002
wherein: na is 0 or 1 ;
Rc is hydrogen or alkyl;
Rd is hydrogen; and
Re is -CO2CRf (phenyl)2 wherein Rf is hydrogen or hydroxy.
Preferably, q is less than p in the multibinding compounds of this invention.
Preferably, each ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from the group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) : R
Figure imgf000008_0001
(a) wherein:
A is an aryl or a heteroaryl ring;
R1 is hydrogen or alkyl;
R2 is selected from a group consisting of formula (i), (ii), (iii), or "Het":
Figure imgf000008_0002
(i) (ϋ) (iii)
wherein: is an optional double bond; n, is an integer of from 1 to 4; n2 is an integer of from 1 to 3;
V is -CH-, -0-, -S(O)n3- (where n3 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl);
"Het" is a heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORa (where Ra is hydrogen, alkyl, or acyl), or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORb (where Rb is hydrogen or alkyl), aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
K is a bond or an alkylene group;
K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(O)n4- (where n4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group; and
B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; provided that at least one of the R5, R6, R7, R8, "Het", or the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker; (2) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000009_0001
(b) wherein:
C is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; R9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R10 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
Q is a single bond or -C(O)O- such that: when Q is a bond then, Q" is a group of formula (iv):
Figure imgf000009_0002
(iv) where:
E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W- R; ι wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -O-, -S-, or -NRg- (wherein Rg is hydrogen or alkyl); and R1 ' is a group of formula (v), (vi), or "Het":
Figure imgf000010_0001
(v) (vi)
wherein:
T and U are, independently of each other, -O- or -CH2-; n5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and "Het" is heteroaryl provided that at least one of C, E, R9, and R10 attaches the ligand to a linker; and when Q is -C(O)O- or -NHC(O)O- then, Q" is a group of formula (vii) or (viii):
Figure imgf000010_0002
wherein: r^ is O or l;
M" is a counterion;
R12 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R13 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and J is:
-(CH 2)2-, -(CH 2)3-, or -CH - -CH - \ /
O provided that at least one of the C, R9, R'°, R12, R13, and R14 attaches the ligand to a linker;
(3) a compound of formula (c):
Figure imgf000011_0001
wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000011_0002
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1, provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinclidine ring attaches the ligand to the linker then n7 is 0; n8 is 1 or 2; g is an integer of from 0 to 3; each R15 is, independently of each other, hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; G is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or cycloalkyl which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; and
G" is a single bond or an alkylene group provided that at least one of the R15, G, and G" attaches the ligand to a linker; (4) a compound of formula (d):
Figure imgf000012_0001
(d) wherein: n9 is 1 or 2; n10 is 0 or 1 provided that n9+n,0 are 1 or 2; P is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
P" is a single bond or an alkylene group;
S is a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the P and S attaches the ligand to a linker; (5) a compound of formula (e):
Figure imgf000012_0002
(e) wherein:
R16 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R17, R18, and R19 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carbamoyl, sulfanoyl, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R20 and R21 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or R20 and R21 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R16, R17, R18, R19, R20, and R2' attaches the ligand to a linker; or (6) a compound of formula (f) :
Figure imgf000013_0001
wherein:
R22 is hydrogen or halo;
R23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl;
R24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R25 and R26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R24, R25, and R26 attaches the ligand to a linker; and each ligand, L, that is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of: (7) a compound of formula (g):
Figure imgf000013_0002
(g) wherein:
D" is alkylene;
D is -NR31R32, -N+(R 3R34R35) or -OR32 where R31, R33, and R34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl; and R32 and R35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; R28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two, or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R29 and R30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R27, R28, R29, or R30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group; or (8) a compound of formula (h):
Figure imgf000014_0001
(h) wherein: nn is an integer of from 1 to 7; n12 is 0 to 7; F is -NR40-, -O-, -S-, or -CHR41- (wherein R40 and R41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl);
F" is a covalent bond, -OR43, -NR42R43, or -N+R43R44R45 wherein R42 is hydrogen or alkyl, R44 and R45 are alkyl, and R43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and
R38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of R38 and R43 attaches the ligand to a linker; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomers, mixture of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that at least one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist. Preferably, each ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of Darifenacin, Tolterodine, Oxybutynin, YM-46303, YM-58790, 5-(2- isopropylimidazol-l-yl)-3,3-diphenyl-2(3H)furanone which is linked to a linker at the 4-position of imidazole ring, 3,3-diphenyl-2(3H)furanone which is linked to a linker at the 5-position of the furanone ring (disclosed in J Med. Chem., 35, 4415- 4424, 1992), 3 - [4-(2-chlorobenzyl)piperizin- 1 -y 1)- 1 -cyclobuty 1- 1 -pheny 1-2- propanone which is linked to a linker via the phenyl ring of the benzyl moiety, 3- (piperizin-l-yl)-l-cyclobutyl-l-phenyl-2-propanone which is linked to a linker via the piperizine ring, 3-[4-(benzylpiperizin-l-yl)-l-cyclobutyl-l-phenyl-2-propanone which is linked to a linker via the phenyl ring of the benzyl moiety, 3-[4- benzylpiperizin-l-yl)-l,l-diphenyl-2-propanone which is linked to a linker via the phenyl ring of the benzyl moiety, 3-(piperizin-l-yl)-l ,l-diphenyl-2-propanone which is linked to a linker via the piperizine ring (disclosed in J. Med. Chem., 36, 610-616, 1993), the derivatives thereof.
Preferably, each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Yb-Z-Xa- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Ya and Yb at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -O-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -NR-, -S(O)n-, -C(O)NR'-, -NR' C(O)-, -NR' C(O)NR'-, -NR C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR-, -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(O)-NR'-, -NR- C(O)-O-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(O)(OR')-O-, -O-P(O)(OR')-, - S(O)nCR' R"-, -S(O)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(O)n -, -S-S-, and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. In a third aspect, this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands wherein each of said ligands comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
In a fourth aspect, this invention provides a method of treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands, comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
In a fifth aspect, this invention provides methods for preparing a multibinding compound of Formula (I). In a sixth aspect, this invention is directed to general synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor. The diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a ligand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and ligand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage. The library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarization. The library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand, different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
This invention is also directed to libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor. These libraries are prepared via the methods described above and permit the rapid and efficient evaluation of what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a ligand or a class of ligands targeting a muscarinic receptor.
Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
In another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
The preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b). Sequential addition is preferred when a mixture of different ligands is employed to ensure heterodimeric or multimeric compounds are prepared. Concurrent addition of the ligands occurs when at least a portion of the multimer comounds prepared are homomultimeric compounds. The assay protocols recited in (d) can be conducted on the multimeric ligand compound library produced in (c) above, or preferably, each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
In one of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
In another of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising: (a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands. In a preferred embodiment, the library of linkers employed in either the methods or the library aspects of this invention is selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers. For example, in one embodiment, each of the linkers in the linker library may comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups. Such linker lengths can preferably range from about 2 to 100A.
In another preferred embodiment, the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands in order to provide for a range of orientations of said ligand on said multimeric ligand compounds. Such reactive functionality includes, by way of example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, and precursors thereof. It is understood, of course, that the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
In other embodiments, the multimeric ligand compound is homomeric (i.e.. each of the ligands is the same, although it may be attached at different points) or heterodimeric (i.e., at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligands). In addition to the combinatorial methods described herein, this invention provides for an interative process for rationally evaluating what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a class of multimeric compounds or ligands targeting a muscarinic receptor. Specifically, this method aspect is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
(a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands;
(b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor;
(c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor;
(d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above; (e) creating a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in said first iteration:
(f) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted enhanced multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the second collection or iteration recited in (e) above;
(g) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints.
Preferably, steps (e) and (f) are repeated at least two times, more preferably at from 2-50 times, even more preferably from 3 to 50 times, and still more preferably at least 5-50 times.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 2 ligands attached in different formats to a linker. FIG. 2 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 3 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
FIG. 3 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker. FIG. 4 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising >4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Definitions This invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are muscarinic receptor antagonists, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods for treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in mammals. When discussing such compounds, compositions or methods, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. Any undefined terms have their art recognized meanings.
The term "alkyl" refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, rc-propyl, /so-propyl, rc-butyl, iso- butyl, n-hexyl, «-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
The term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO- aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl, and -NRaRb, wherein Ra and Rb may be the same or different and and are chosen from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. The term substituted alkyl also includes an alkyl chain where in one or more of the carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom such as -O-, -S(O)n- (where n is 0 to 2), -NR- (where R is hydrogen or alkyl). This term is exemplified by groups such as hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, 2-aminoethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-methylaminoethyl, 3- dimethylaminopropyl, 2-sulfonamidoethyl, 2-carboxyethyl, and the like.
The term "alkylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2- ), the propylene isomers (e.g., -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-) and the like. The term "substituted alkylene" refers to an alkylene group, as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino. substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, - SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substituted alkylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group. Preferably such fused groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures.
The term "alkaryl" or "aralkyl" refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and - substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like. The term "alkoxy" refers to the groups alkyl-O-, alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyl-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein. Preferred alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, rt-propoxy, wo-propoxy, /7-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, «-pentoxy, «-hexoxy, 1 ,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like. The term "substituted alkoxy" refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein. The term "haloalkoxy" refers to the groups alkyl-O- wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group have been substituted with a halo group and include, by way of examples, groups such as trifluoromethoxy, and the like.
The term "alkylalkoxy" refers to the groups -alkylene-O-alkyl, alkylene-O-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-O-alkyl, and substituted alkylene- O-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl. substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein. Preferred alkylalkoxy groups are alkylene-O-alkyl and include, by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH2OCH3), ethylenemethoxy (-CH2CH2OCH3), tt-propylene-z'so-propoxy (-CH2CH2CH2OCH(CH3)2), methylene-t-butoxy (-CH2-O-C(CH3)3), and the like. The term "alkylthioalkoxy" refers to the group -alkylene-S-alkyl, alkylene-S-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-S-alkyl and substituted alkylene- S-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein. Preferred alkylthioalkoxy groups are alkylene-S- alkyl and include, by way of example, methylenethiomethoxy (-CH2SCH3), ethylenethiomethoxy (-CH2CH2SCH3), tt-propylene-z'so-thiopropoxy
(-CH2CH2CH2SCH(CH3)2), methylene-t-thiobutoxy (-CH2SC(CH3)3), and the like.
The term "alkenyl" refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1 -6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH=CH2), H-propenyl (-CH2CH=CH2), iso- propenyl (-C(CH3)-CH2), and the like.
The term "substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl.
The term "alkenylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (-CH=CH-), the propenylene isomers (e.g., -CH2CH=CH- or -C(CH3)=CH-), and the like.
The term "substituted alkenylene" refers to an alkenylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, - SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substituted alkenylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkenylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkenylene group.
The term "alkynyl" refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C≡CH), propargyl (-CH2C≡CH), and the like.
The term "substituted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl.
The term "alkynylene" refers to a diradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynylene groups include ethynylene (-C≡C-), propargylene (-CH2C≡C-), and the like.
The term "substituted alkynylene" refers to an alkynylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy. thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl. -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl.
The term "acyl" refers to the groups HC(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-. substituted alkyl - C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic- C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein. The term "acylamino" or "aminocarbonyl" refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino) wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein. The term "aminoacyl" refers to the group -NRC(0)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aminoacyloxy" or "alkoxycarbonylamino" refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "acyloxy" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl- C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)0-, aryl-C(O)O-, heteroaryl-C(O)O-, and heterocyclic-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2- substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
The term "aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above. The term " arylene " refers to the diradical derived from aryl (including substituted aryl) as defined above and is exemplified by 1 ,2-phenylene, 1,3- phenylene, 1 ,4-phenylene, 1 ,2-naphthylene and the like. The term " amino " refers to the group -NH2. The term " substituted amino " refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic provided that both R's are not hydrogen.
The term " carboxyalkyl" or "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to the groups "-C(O)O-alkyl", "-C(O)O-substituted alkyl", "-C(O)O-cycloalkyl", "-C(O)O- substituted cycloalkyl", "-C(O)O-alkenyl", "-C(O)O-substituted alkenyl", "-C(O)O-alkynyl" and "-C(O)O-substituted alkynyl" where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl and substituted alkynyl alkynyl are as defined herein. The term "cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
The term "substituted cycloalkyl" refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl. azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl. carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation. Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl, and the like. The term "substituted cycloalkenyl" refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido. cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. The term "halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo. The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring). Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO- heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
The term "heteroaralkyl" refers to the groups -alkylene-heteroaryl where alkylene and heteroaryl are defined herein. Such heteroaralkyl groups are exemplified by pyridylmethyl, pyridylethyl, indolylmethyl, and the like. The term "heteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-O-. The term " heteroarylene " refers to the diradical group derived from heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl), as defined above, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-pyridylene, 2,4-pyridiylene, 1 ,2-quinolinylene, 1 ,8-quinolinylene, 1 ,4-benzofuranylene, 2,5-pyridnylene, 2,5-indolenyl, and the like.
The term "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" or refers to a monoradical saturated unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include morpholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
Examples of nitrogen heteroaryls and heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, thiophene, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, morpholine, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophene, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heterocycles.
The term " heterocyclooxy " refers to the group heterocyclic-O-. The term " thioheterocyclooxy " refers to the group heterocyclic-S-. The term " heterocyclene " refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-morpholino, 2, 5 -morpholino and the like.
"Heterocycloamino" means a saturated monovalent cyclic group of 4 to 8 ring atoms, wherein at least one ring atom is N and optionally contains one or two additional ring heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of N, O, or S(O)n (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), the remaining ring atoms being C, where one or two C atoms may optionally be replaced by a carbonyl group. The heterocycloamino ring may be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring, and it may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents, preferably one or two substituents, selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, halo, cyano, acyl, amino, substituted amino, acylamino, -OR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, acyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl), or -S(O)nR [where n is an integer from 0 to 2 and R is hydrogen (provided that n is 0), alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, amino, heterocyclo, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl]. More specifically the term heterocycloamino includes, but is not limited to, pyrrolidino, piperidino, morpholino, piperazino, indolino, or thiomorpholino, and the derivatives thereof.
The term " oxyacylamino " or "aminocarbonyloxy" refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. The term " spiro-attached cycloalkyl group " refers to a cycloalkyl group attached to another ring via one carbon atom common to both rings. The term "thiol" refers to the group -SH.
The term "thioalkoxy" or "alkylthio" refers to the group -S-alkyl. The term "substituted thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl. The term "thioaryloxy" refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
The term "thioheteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above. As to any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents, it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salt" refers to salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the multibinding compounds of this invention and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. In many cases, the multibinding compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
Pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases, include by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts. Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, tri substituted cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkenyl) amines, tri(cycloalkenyl) amines, substituted cycloalkenyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkenyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkenyl amines, aryl amines, diaryl amines, triaryl amines, heteroaryl amines, diheteroaryl amines, triheteroaryl amines, heterocyclic amines, diheterocyclic amines, triheterocyclic amines, mixed di- and tri-amines where at least two of the substituents on the amine are different and are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and the like. Also included are amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group. Examples of suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(/so-propyl) amine, tri(π-propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, Iysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like. It should also be understood that other carboxylic acid derivatives would be useful in the practice of this invention, for example, carboxylic acid amides, including carboxamides, lower alkyl carboxamides, dialkyl carboxamides, and the like.
Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids. Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, / oluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
The term " pharmaceutically-acceptable cation " refers to the cation of a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
The term "library" refers to at least 3, preferably from 102 to 10° and more preferably from 102 to 104 multimeric compounds. Preferably, these compounds are prepared as a multiplicity of compounds in a single solution or reaction mixture which permits facile synthesis thereof. In one embodiment, the library of multimeric compounds can be directly assayed for multibinding properties. In another embodiment, each member of the library of multimeric compounds is first isolated and, optionally, characterized. This member is then assayed for multibinding properties.
The term "collection" refers to a set of multimeric compounds which are prepared either sequentially or concurrently (e.g., combinatorially). The collection comprises at least 2 members; preferably from 2 to 109 members and still more preferably from 10 to 104 members.
The term "multimeric compound" refers to compounds comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently connected through at least one linker which compounds may or may not possess multibinding properties (as defined herein). The term "pseudohalide" refers to functional groups which react in displacement reactions in a manner similar to a halogen. Such functional groups include, by way of example, mesyl, tosyl, azido and cyano groups.
The term "protecting group" or "blocking group" refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl groups of the compounds (including intermediates thereof) prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl group. The particular removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substituents such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t-butyl- diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product. Preferred removable thiol blocking groups include disulfide groups, acyl groups, benzyl groups, and the like. Preferred removable amino blocking groups include conventional substituents such as t-butyoxycarbonyl (t-BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), fluorenylmethoxy-carbonyl (FMOC), allyloxycarbonyl (ALOC), and the like which can be removed by conventional conditions compatible with the nature of the product. Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
The term "optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event, circumstance or substituent may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
The term "ligand" as used herein denotes a compound that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist. The specific region or regions of the ligand that is (are) recognized by the receptor is designated as the "ligand domain". A ligand may be either capable of binding to the receptor by itself, or may require the presence of one or more non-ligand components for binding (e.g., Ca+2, Mg"2 or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites). Examples of ligands useful in this invention are described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that portions of the ligand structure that are not essential for specific molecular recognition and binding activity may be varied substantially, replaced or substituted with unrelated structures (for example, with ancillary groups as defined below) and, in some cases, omitted entirely without affecting the binding interaction. The primary requirement for a ligand is that it has a ligand domain as defined above. It is understood that the term ligand is not intended to be limited to compounds known to be useful in binding to muscarinic receptor (e.g., known drugs). Those skilled in the art will understand that the term ligand can equally apply to a molecule that is not normally associated with receptor binding properties. In addition, it should be noted that ligands that exhibit marginal activity or lack useful activity as monomers can be highly active as multivalent compounds because of the benefits conferred by multi valency.
The term "multibinding compound or agent" refers to a compound that is capable of multivalency, as defined below, and which has 2-10 ligands covalently bound to one or more linkers which may be the same or different. Multibinding compounds provide a biological and/or therapeutic effect greater than the aggregate of unlinked ligands equivalent thereto which are made available for binding. That is to say that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the ligands attached to the multibinding compound is greater than that achieved by the same amount of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding sites (receptors). The phrase "increased biological or therapeutic effect" includes, for example: increased affinity, increased selectivity for target, increased specificity for target, increased potency, increased efficacy, decreased toxicity, improved duration of activity or action, decreased side effects, increased therapeutic index, improved bioavailibity, improved pharmacokinetics, improved activity spectrum, and the like. The multibinding compounds of this invention will exhibit at least one and preferably more than one of the above-mentioned affects. The term "univalency" as used herein refers to a single binding interaction between one ligand as defined herein with one ligand binding site as defined herein. It should be noted that a compound having multiple copies of a ligand (or ligands) exhibit univalency when only one ligand is interacting with a ligand binding site. Examples of univalent interactions are depicted below.
Figure imgf000038_0001
The term "multivalency" as used herein refers to the concurrent binding of from 2 to 10 linked ligands (which may be the same or different) and two or more corresponding receptors (ligand binding sites) on one or more receptors which may be the same or different.
For example, two ligands connected through a linker that bind concurrently to two ligand binding sites would be considered as bivalency; three ligands thus connected would be an example of trivalency. An example of trivalent binding, illustrating a multibinding compound bearing three ligands versus a monovalent binding interaction, is shown below:
Figure imgf000038_0002
univalent interaction
Figure imgf000039_0001
trivalent interaction
It should be understood that all compounds that contain multiple copies of a ligand attached to a linker or to linkers do not necessarily exhibit the phenomena of multivalency, i.e., that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the multibinding agent is greater than the sum of the aggregate of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding site (receptor). For multivalency to occur, the ligands that are connected by a linker or linkers have to be presented to their ligand binding sites by the linker(s) in a specific manner in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding event.
The term "potency" refers to the minimum concentration at which a ligand is able to achieve a desirable biological or therapeutic effect. The potency of a ligand is typically proportional to its affinity for its ligand binding site. In some cases, the potency may be non-linearly correlated with its affinity. In comparing the potency of two drugs, e.g., a multibinding agent and the aggregate of its unlinked ligand, the dose-response curve of each is determined under identical test conditions (e.g.. in an in vitro or in vivo assay, in an appropriate animal model). The finding that the multbinding agent produces an equivalent biological or therapeutic effect at a lower concentration than the aggregate unlinked ligand is indicative of enhanced potency. The term "selectivity" or "specificity" is a measure of the binding preferences of a ligand for different ligand binding sites (receptors). The selectivity of a ligand with respect to its target ligand binding site relative to another ligand binding site is given by the ratio of the respective values of Kd (i.e., the dissociation constants for each ligand-receptor complex) or. in cases where a biological effect is observed below the Kd , the ratio of the respective EC50's (i.e., the concentrations that produce 50% of the maximum response for the ligand interacting with the two distinct ligand binding sites (receptors)).
The term "ligand binding site" denotes the site on the muscarinic receptor that recognizes a ligand domain and provides a binding partner for the ligand. The ligand binding site may be defined by monomeric or multimeric structures. This interaction may be capable of producing a unique biological effect, for example, agonism, antagonism, modulatory effects, may maintain an ongoing biological event, and the like. It should be recognized that the ligand binding sites of the receptor that participate in biological multivalent binding interactions are constrained to varying degrees by their intra- and inter-molecular associations (e.g., such macromolecular structures may be covalently joined to a single structure, noncovalently associated in a multimeric structure, embedded in a membrane or polymeric matrix, and so on) and therefore have less translational and rotational freedom than if the same structures were present as monomers in solution.
The terms "agonism" and "antagonism" are well known in the art. The term "modulatory effect" refers to the ability of the ligand to change the activity of an agonist or antagonist through binding to a ligand binding site. The term "allosteric modulator" as used herein denotes a compound that can regulate the activity of a muscarinic receptor. The allosteric modulator can regulate the activity of a muscarinic receptor in several ways i.e., by increasing the affinity of a muscarinic receptor for its antagonists (see., Nedoma, J. S. et al, Synoptic Transmitters and Receptors (S. Tucek, ed.) Academia. Prague/Wiley, Chichester, 1987, 108-112; and Tucek, S. et al., Mol. Pharmacol. 1990, 38:674-680; Dong,
G.Z. et al, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1995, 274:378-384; Dong, G.Z. et al., Biomed. Res. 1995, 16:327-335; Proska, J. and Tucek, S., Mol. Pharmacol. 1995, 48:696- 702; and Proska, J. and Tucek, S., Ewr. J. of Pharmacol. 1996, 201-205) or decreasing the affinity of a muscarinic receptor for its agonists (see.. Clark, A.L. and Mitchelson, F., Br. J. Pharmacol. 1976, 58:323-331 ; Christopoulos, A. and Mitchelson, F., Mol. Pharmacol. 1994. 46:105-1 14; and Tucek S. and Proska, J., TiPS. 1995, Vol. (16), 205-212). It can also regulate the a muscarinic receptor's activity by effecting the association or dissociation of a muscarinic receptor agonist or antagonist as described in Trankle, C. et al., Mol. Pharmacol. 1998, 53:304-312; and Holzgrabe, U. and Mohr, K., DDT. 1998, Vol. 3. No. 5. 214-222. Compounds that effect the affinity of muscarinic receptors for their natural ligand are well known in the art. For example, gallamine inhibits the binding of [3H]-(-)-N- methylscopolamine and other specific ligands to muscarinic receptors (see., Fryer, A.D and El-Fakahany, E.D., 1998, Membrane Biochem., 8, 122; and Jacoby, E.E., et al. 1993, J. Clin. Invest., 91, 1314).
The term "inert organic solvent" or "inert organic solvent" means a solvent which is inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith including, by way of example only, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, methylene chloride, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, acetone, methylethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, t-butanol, dioxane, pyridine, and the like. Unless specified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions described herein are inert solvents.
The term "treatment" refers to any treatment of a pathologic condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and includes: (i) preventing the pathologic condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition but has not yet been diagnosed with the condition and, accordingly, the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the disease condition;
(ii) inhibiting the pathologic condition, i.e., arresting its development; (iii) relieving the pathologic condition, i.e., causing regression of the pathologic condition; or
(iv) relieving the conditions mediated by the pathologic condition. The term "pathologic condition which is modulated by treatment with a ligand" covers all disease states (i.e., pathologic conditions) which are generally acknowledged in the art to be usefully treated with a ligand for the muscarinic receptors in general, and those disease states which have been found to be usefully treated by a specific multibinding compound of our invention. Such disease states include, by way of example only, the treatment of a mammal afflicted with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of multibinding compound which is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined above, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment. The therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
The term "linker", identified where appropriate by the symbol 'X' refers to a group or groups that covalently attaches from 2 to 10 ligands (as identified above) in a manner that provides for a compound capable of multivalency. Among other features, the linker is a ligand-orienting entity that permits attachment of multiple copies of a ligand (which may be the same or different) thereto. In some cases, the linker may itself be biologically active. Additionally, the linker can be either a chiral or achiral molecule. The term "linker" does not, however, extend to cover solid inert supports such as beads, glass particles, fibers, and the like. But it is understood that the multibinding compounds of this invention can be attached to a solid support if desired. For example, such attachment to solid supports can be made for use in separation and purification processes and similar applications. The extent to which multivalent binding is realized depends upon the efficiency with which the linker or linkers that joins the ligands presents these ligands to the array of available ligand binding sites. Beyond presenting these ligands for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites, the linker or linkers spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker or linkers. Thus, the structural features of the linker (valency, geometry, orientation, size, flexibility, chemical composition, etc.) are features of multibinding agents that play an important role in determining their activities.
The linkers used in this invention are selected to allow multivalent binding of ligands to the ligand binding sites of a muscarinic receptor, whether such sites are located interiorly, both interiorly and on the periphery of the enzyme structure, or at any intermediate position thereof.
"Pro-drugs" means any compound which releases an active parent drug according to Formula (I) in vivo when such prodrug is administered to a mammalian subject. Prodrugs of a compound of Formula (I) are prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound of Formula (I) in such a way that the modifications may be cleaved in vivo to release the parent compound. Prodrugs include compounds of Formula (I) wherein a hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group in compound (I) is bonded to any group that may be cleaved in vivo to regenerate the free hydroxyl, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to esters (e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives), carbamates (e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl) of hydroxy functional groups in compounds of Formula (I), and the like.
PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS While the broadest definition of this invention is set forth in the Summary of the Invention, certain compounds of Formula (I) are preferred. (A) A preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) shown below:
Within this group (A), a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein both the ligands are muscarinic receptor antagonists and are selected from the group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) :
Figure imgf000044_0001
(a) wherein:
A is a phenyl or a pyridine ring;
R1 is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl, more preferably hydrogen;
R2 is selected from a group consisting of (i), (ii), (iii), or "Het":
Figure imgf000044_0002
(i) (ϋ) (iii)
wherein: is an optional double bond; n, is 3 or 4; n2 is 1 or 2;
V is -CH- or -NR4- (wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl), preferably -CH-;
"Het" is a heteroaryl ring, preferably pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, or imidazolyl which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
R3 is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably hydrogen or methyl, more preferably hydrogen;
R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, methyl, phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxy, or amino, benzyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, carboxy, or amino or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, more preferably hydrogen or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, nitro, hydroxy, or amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, most preferably R6, R7, and R8 are hydrogen or one of R6, R7, and R8 attaches the ligand to a linker;
K is a bond or an alkylene group, preferably a single bond or a methylene group;
K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(O)n4- (where n4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group, preferably a single bond or a methylene group; and
B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably B is a group selected from a group consisting of:
Figure imgf000045_0001
„
0) (k) (1)
wherein: nπ and n,4 are, independently of each other, an integer of from 1 to 4 provided that n,3+nl4 are integer of from 3 to 5; n15 and n17 are, independently of each other, an integer of from 1 to 4 provided that n15+n17 are integer of from 3 to 5; n16 is an integer of from 1 to 3 provided that n15 + n16 are an integer of from 3 to 5; nI8, n19 and n20 are, independently of each other, an integer of from 0 to 3 provided that n18+ n,9 + n20 are 2 or 3; n21 is an integer of from 1 to 3; Wa and Wc are, independently of each other,:
(9)n R ,q44
22 R
X N~R 4 or > R 4
where n22 is 0 or 1 ;
R42 and R43 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aralkyl, or heterocyclylalkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R44 is alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl; and Wb is -N(O)n23 or -N+-R45 where n23 is 0 or 1 , and R45 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; provided that one of the R5, R6, R7, R8, and the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker.
Within this group (1) a more preferred group an even more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: A is a phenyl; R2 is a group of formula (iii)
Figure imgf000046_0001
(iii)
wherein R6, R7 and R8 are either hydrogen or one of R6, R7 and R8 optionally attaches the ligand to a linker and the others are hydrogen; K and K" are bond; and B is: (a) pyrrolidine, piperidine, or hexahydroazepine optionally atttaching the ligand to a linker, preferably piperidin-4-yl wherein the nitrogen at the 1 position optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
(b) quinuclidine, l-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, or l-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl optionally attaching the ligand to a linker wherein a bridge head carbon atom or a carbon atom adjacent thereto is the binding position with the oxygen atom; preferably quinuclidin-3-yl, quinuclidin-4-yl wherein the nitrogen optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; or
(c) a ring represented by the following general formulae:
Figure imgf000047_0001
wherein Wc is as defined above; or (2) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000047_0002
(b) wherein:
C is an aryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
R9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, alkyl substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R10 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and when Q is a single bond then Q" is a group of formula (iv):
Figure imgf000048_0001
(iv) where:
E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W- R" wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -O-, -S-, or -NRa- wherein Ra is hydrogen or alkyl; and R" is a group of formula (v), (vi) or "Het":
Figure imgf000048_0002
(v) ( i)
wherein:
T and U are independently of each other -O- or -CH2-; n5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and
"Het" is heteroaryl; and when Q is -NHC(O)O- then Q" is a group of formula (viii)
Figure imgf000048_0003
(viii)
wherein n6 is 0 or 1 ;
R13 is alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
Within this group (2) a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: when Q is a bond then: R9 is aminocarbonyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; C and R10 are phenyl;
E is -CH2-W-R" wherein W is -CH2- and R" is a group of formula (v) or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
Figure imgf000049_0001
(v)
and when Q is -NHC(O)O- then: R9 is hydrogen; C and R'° are phenyl; and Q" is a group of formula (viii)
Figure imgf000049_0002
wherein n^ is 0 and R14 is hydrogen, alkyl. or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or
(3) a compound of formula (c):
Figure imgf000049_0003
wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000050_0001
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1 provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinclidine ring attaches the ligand to a linker then n7 is 0; n8 is 2; g is an integer of from 0 or 1 ;
R15 is hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino. or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, or hydroxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
G is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or cycloalkyl which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably phenyl, pyridin-4-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-2-yl, thiophen-2-yl, thiophen-3-yl, furan-2-yl, 4-chlorophenyl, cyclohexyl, 2-, 3-, or 4- fluorophenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4-methylphenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4-nitrophenyl, 2-, 3-, or 4- aminophenyl, 3, 4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4,5 -trimethoxyphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 24- isopropylphenyl, 3-ethylaminophenyl, 2-methylaminophenyl, 3- dimethylaminophenyl, 4-methoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-thiolphenyl, 4- methylthiophenyl, 4-methylsulfoxidephenyl, 4-methylsulfonylphenyl, N- methylpiperidin-4-yl, pyrrol-2-yl, oxazol-2-yl, quinolin-4-yl, isoquinolin-4-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, benzothiophen-3-yl, morpholin-4-yl, piperazin-1-yl, piperidin-4- yl, dichlorophenyl, 4-aminomethylphenyl, 4-hydroxymethylphenyl, cyclopentyl which optionally link the ligand to a linker; and G" is a single bond or an alkylene group, preferably a single bond or a methylene group. Within this group (3), a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: g is O; G is a phenyl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; and
G" is a single bond; or (4) a compound of formula (e) :
Figure imgf000051_0001
(e) wherein: R16 is alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R17, R18, and R19 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker, more preferably hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
R20 and R21 are. independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker; or R20 and R21 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker.
Within this group (4) a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: R16 is methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
R17 is either meta or para to the -OR16 group and is hydrogen, hydroxy, or methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
R18 is hydrogen;
R19 is hydrogen or hydroxy, preferably hydrogen; and R20and R21 are N,N-(isopropyl)amino. N-methyl-N-tert-butylamino, 2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidino, N-methyl-N-adamantylamino which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, or one of R20 and R21 is hydrogen or alkyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably N,N-(isopropyl)amino, N- methyl-N-tert-butylamino, or one of R20 and R21 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or (5) a compound of formula (f):
Figure imgf000052_0001
wherein: R22 is hydrogen or halo;
R23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl, preferably cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, adamantyl, pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl, piperidin-1-ylmethyl, piperazin-1 -ylmethyl wherein the nitrogen at the 4-position of the piperazine ring is optionally substituted with a substituent selected from fluoro, hydroxy, nitro. methoxy, methyl, or trifluoromethyl, or phenyl, naphthyl, or pyridyl optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents selected from fluoro, hydroxy, nitro, methoxy. methyl, trifluoromethyl, methylcarbonyl, or amino;
R24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, fluoro or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R25 and R26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker, preferably hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, phenylethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker.
Within this group (5), a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: R22 is hydrogen or fluoro, preferably hydrogen; R23 is cyclohexyl;
R24 is hydroxy or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker.
(B) Another more preferred group of compounds is that wherein one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonists selected from the groups (A)(1) to (A)(5) described above, and the other is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor said allosteric modulator is selected from the group consisting of: (6) a compound of formula (g):
Figure imgf000053_0001
(g) wherein:
D" is alkylene, preferably -(CH2)n43- where n43 is an integer of from 1-10. more preferably 2-8;
D is -NR31R32, -N+(R33R34R35)M" or -OR32 where R31, R33, and R34 are. independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl, and R32 and R35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, preferably R3', R33, and R34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or methyl, and R32 and R33 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy. carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino. mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R29 and R30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R27, R28, R29, or R30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group.
Within this group, a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein:
R27, R28, R29, and R30 are hydrogen; or
(7) a compound of formula (h)
Figure imgf000054_0001
(h) wherein: nπ is an integer of from 1 to 7; n12 is an integer of from 0 to 7;
F is -NR40-, -O-, -S-, or -CHR41- wherein R40 and R41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl;
F" is a covalent bond, -OR43, -NR4 R43 wherein R42 is hydrogen or alkyl, or N+(R43R44R45) wherein R44 and R45 are alkyl, and R43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and R38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, or alkoxy.
Within this group (7), a more preferred group of compounds is that wherein: R36 and R38 are hydrogen.
R37 is ortho to the -(CHR38)- group and is hydrogen or alkoxy, preferably methoxy;
F is -O-, -NH-, or -N(CH3)-;
F" is methylamino, dimethylamino wherein the nitrogen atom is attached to a linker.
Within the above preferred groups A and (B), particularly preferred group of compounds is that wherein the linker, X, in the bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Yb-Z-Xa- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
Ya and Yb at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -O-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)0-, -NR-, -S(O)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR' C(O)-, -NR' C(O)NR'-, -NR C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR'-, -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(O)-NR-, -NR'- C(O)-O-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(O)(OR')-, - S(O)nCR R"-, -S(O)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(O)n -, -S-S-, and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
Particularly preferred compounds are listed below:
I. Compounds of Formula (I) where p is 2 and q is 1 and other groups are as defined below are:
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000056_0002
Figure imgf000057_0003
II. Compounds of Formula (I) where p is 2 and q is 1 and other groups are as defined below are:
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000057_0004
III. Other preferred compounds of Formula (I) where p is 2 and q is 1 and other groups are as shown below are:
Figure imgf000057_0002
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000058_0002
GENERAL SYNTHETIC SCHEME
Compounds of this invention can be made by the methods depicted in the reaction schemes shown below.
The starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA), Bachem (Torrance, California, USA),
Emka-Chemie, or Sigma (St. Louis, Missouri, USA) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-15 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers. 1989), Organic Reactions. Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991), March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition), and Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989).
The starting materials and the intermediates of the reaction may be isolated and purified if desired using conventional techniques, including but not limited to filtration, distillation, crystallization, chromatography, and the like. Such materials may be characterized using conventional means, including physical constants and spectral data.
Furthermore, it will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures. Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
These schemes are merely illustrative of some methods by which the compounds of this invention can be synthesized, and various modifications to these schemes can be made and will be suggested to one skilled in the art having referred to this disclosure.
Preparation of a multibinding compound of Formula (I) A bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared by covalently attaching the ligands, L, to a linker, X, as shown in Scheme I below.
Scheme I
2 L-^ + FG2 X FG2 L X
In general, a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared, as shown above, by covalently attaching the ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist or a muscarinic receptor modulator to a linker, X, where FG1 and FG2 represent a functional group such as halo, amino, hydroxy, thio, aldehyde, ketone, carboxy, carboxy derivatives such as acid halide, ester, amido, and the like.
The ligands are covalently attached to the linker using conventional chemical techniques providing for covalent linkage of the ligand to the linker. Reaction chemistries resulting in such linkages are well known in the art and involve the use of complementary functional groups on the linker and ligand as shown in Table I below.
Table I Representative Complementary Binding Chemistries
First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage carboxyl amine amide sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide β-hydroxyamine amine alkyl/aryl halide alkylamine hydroxyl carboxyl ester
Reaction between a carboxylic acid of either the linker or the ligand and a primary or secondary amine of the ligand or the linker in the presence of suitable, well-known activating agents such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, results in formation of an amide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; reaction between an amine group of either the linker or the ligand and a sulfonyl halide of the ligand or the linker, in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, pyridine. and the like ,results in formation of a sulfonamide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; and reaction between an alcohol or phenol group of either the linker or the ligand and an alkyl or aryl halide of the ligand or the linker in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, pyridine, and the like, results in formation of an ether bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker. Any compound which inhibits a muscarinic receptor or is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor can be used as a ligand in this invention. As discussed in further detail below, numerous antagonists and allosteric modulators of muscarinic receptor are known in the art and any of these known compounds or derivatives thereof may be employed as ligands in this invention. Typically, a compound selected for use as a ligand will have at least one functional group, such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like, which allows the compound to be readily coupled to the linker. Compounds having such functionality are either known in the art or can be prepared by routine modification of known compounds using conventional reagents and procedures. The patents and publications set forth below provide numerous examples of suitably functionalized muscarinic receptor antagonist, allosteric modulators and intermediates thereof which may be used as ligands in this invention. For example, a ligand having formula (a):
Figure imgf000061_0001
(a)
wherein A is a phenyl or pyridine ring and other groups are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 747 355; Naito. R. et al, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1998, 46(8). 1286. A ligand having formula (b):
Figure imgf000061_0002
(b) wherein the groups C and R10 are phenyl, R9 is cyano or aminocarbonyl, Q is a bond, and Q" is a group of formula
Figure imgf000062_0001
wherein E is as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in U.S. Patent No. 5,096,890 and Drugs of the Future, 1996, 21(1 1), 1 105. Such ligands include Darifenacin and the derivatives thereof. A ligand having formula (b):
Figure imgf000062_0002
(b) wherein C and R10 are phenyl, R9 is hydrogen, Q is -NHC(O)0- and Q" is a group of formula (v) or (vi)
Figure imgf000062_0003
wherein n6, J, R12, R13, and R14 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in U.S. Patent No. 3,505,337, EP 418 716, Drugs of the Future, 1997, 22(2) 135, EP 603229, PCT Application No. WO 93/06098, Naito, R et al, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1998, 46(8), 1274, Ninomiya K et al, Tetrahedron, 1974, 30, 2251 and PCT Application No. WO 92/06958. Such ligands include Tiotropium, Ipratropium, Revatropate, Atropine, YM-58790, and the derivatives thereof.
A ligand having formula (c):
Figure imgf000063_0001
wherein n8, R15, G, G', and G" are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 801 067. Such ligands include YM-53705, and the derivatives thereof.
A ligand having formula (d):
Figure imgf000063_0002
(d)
wherein n9, n10, S, P and P" are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in JP 258 250; A ligand having formula (e):
Figure imgf000063_0003
(e) wherein R16-R21 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 325 571 and Drugs of the Future, 1997, 22(7), 733. Such ligands include Tolterodine and the derivatives thereof.
A ligand having formula (f):
Figure imgf000064_0001
(f) wherein R22-26 are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in EP 251 126. Such ligands include Oxybutynin and the derivatives thereof.
A ligand having formula (g):
Figure imgf000064_0002
(g) wherein R27-R30, D and D" are as defined above, can be prepared by the procedures described in Kostenis, E. et al. Eur. J. Med. Chem., 1994, Vol. 29, 947.
Such ligands include allosteric modulator W-84 and derivatives thereof.
A ligand having formula (h):
Figure imgf000064_0003
(h) wherein nu, n12, F, F", and R36-R39 are as defined above can be prepared by the procedures well known in the art e.g., Quaglia, W., et al., IL FARMACO, 46(3), 417-434, (1991); Melchiorre, C, et al., J. Med. Chem., 32, 79-84, (1989); Minarini, A., et al., IL FARMACO, 46(10), 1167-1178, (1991); Alvarez, M., et al., J. Med. Chem., 30, 1186-1193 (1987); and Melchiorre, C, et al, J. Med. Chem., 30, 201- 204, (1987).
Methods (a)-(e) below illustrate synthesis of bivalent multibinding compounds of Formula (I). They are given to enable those skilled in the art to more clearly understand the present invention. They should not be considered as limiting the scope of the invention, but merely as being illustrative and representative thereof.
Methods (a) and (b) below illustrate synthesis of a bivalent compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are selected from a compound of formula (a). Methodfa^)
Figure imgf000065_0001
Method (b HO— {-Bji + FG2-X-FG2 HO t"B l x- 1 HO +
6
Figure imgf000066_0001
R
2
In method (a), reaction of an amine of formula 1 or an isocycante of formula 2 with a heterocycloamino group of formula 3 where PG is a suitable amino protecting group (such as tert-butoxycarbonyl, benzyl, and the like) gives a compound of formula (a). The reaction is carried out in the presence of a base such as sodium hydride, sodium methoxide, and the like. Suitable solvents include inert organic organic solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, and the like. Amines and isocyantes of formula 1 and 2 are commercially available or can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example, 2-biphenylisocyanate and 2-aminobiphenyl are commercially available. Compound (a) is then converted to a bivalent multibinding compound of
Formula (I) by first removing the protecting group on the nitrogen and then reacting it with a linker of formula 5. The nature of the FG2 group depends on the type of linker group desired. For example, if X is an alkylene chain then FG2 would preferably be halide. If the attachement of (a) to the linker is via an amido group then FG2 would preferably be a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid derivative such as acid chloride, ester, and the like. Compounds of formula 5 are commercially available or they can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example. 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dibromoethane, 1 ,2-dibromopropane, phthalic acid are commercially available. Suitable solvents include inert organic organic solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, and the like.
Alternatively, a compound of Formula (I) can be prepared as shown in Method (b) above. In this method, 2 equivalents of a heterocycloamino group of formula 3 is reacted with one equivalent of a linker of formula 5 as described previously to give a dihydroxy compound of formula 6 which is then converted to a compound of Formula (I) by reacting it with an amine I or an isocyanate of formula 2 as described in method (a) above.
Method (c) and (d) below illustrate synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are selected from a compound of formula (c) where G is phenyl. Method (c)
Figure imgf000067_0001
Method (d)
Figure imgf000068_0001
(I)
In method (c), a 2-phenylethylamine of formula 7 is condensed with benzoic acid to give an amide of formula 8. The reaction is carried out in the presence of a coupling agent such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. and the like. Cyclization of 8 followed by hydrogenation of the resulting imine 9 provides a tetrahydroisoquinoline of formula 10. Reaction of K) with 4-nitrophenyl- chloro formate provides a carbamate of formula H which is then reacted with a hydroxyamine of formula 12. to give a compound of formula (c). Treatment of 2 equivalents of compound (c) with one equivalent of formula 5 provides a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I).
Method (d) illustrates synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) with a different point of attachement to the linker.
Method (e) below illustrate synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the one of the ligand is selected from a a muscarinic receptor antagonist ((selected from compound of formula (a)) and the other is a modulator of a muscarinic receptor ((selected from a compound of formula (g)). Method (e)
Figure imgf000069_0001
(9)
13
Figure imgf000069_0002
(a) (I)
A bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the one of the ligands is selected from a compound of formula (a) (a muscarinic receptor antagonist) and the other is selected from a compound of formula (g) (a modulator of a muscarinic receptor) can be prepared by first reacting one equivivalent of a compound of (g) where D is -NR31R32 (where R3' and R32 are as defined above) with a linking compound of formula 5 to give a compound of formula 13. Compound 13 is then reacted with a compound of formula (a) to give a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I). A compound of formula (g) can be prepared from commercially available phthalimides. For example, a compound of formula (g) where D" is propyl and D is dimethylamino group can be prepared by reacting commercially available N-(3-bromopropyl)phthalimide with dimethylamine.
It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that the above chemistries is not limited to preparing bivalent multibinding compounds of Formula (I) and can be used to prepare tri-, tetra-, etc., multibinding compounds of Formula (I).
The linker is attached to the ligand at a position that retains ligand domain- ligand binding site interaction and specifically which permits the ligand domain of the ligand to orient itself to bind to the ligand binding site. Such positions and synthetic protocols for linkage are well known in the art. The term linker embraces everything that is not considered to be part of the ligand.
The relative orientation in which the ligand domains are displayed derives from the particular point or points of attachment of the ligands to the linker, and on the framework geometry. The determination of where acceptable substitutions can be made on a ligand is typically based on prior knowledge of structure-activity relationships (SAR) of the ligand and/or congeners and/or structural information about ligand-receptor complexes (e.g.. X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like). Such positions and the synthetic methods for covalent attachment are well known in the art. Following attachment to the selected linker (or attachment to a significant portion of the linker, for example 2-10 atoms of the linker), the univalent linker- ligand conjugate may be tested for retention of activity in the relevant assay.
The linker, when covalently attached to multiple copies of the ligands, provides a biocompatible, substantially non-immunogenic multibinding compound. The biological activity of the multibinding compound is highly sensitive to the valency, geometry, composition, size, flexibility or rigidity, etc. of the linker and, in turn, on the overall structure of the multibinding compound, as well as the presence or absence of anionic or cationic charge, the relative hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity of the linker, and the like on the linker. Accordingly, the linker is preferably chosen to maximize the biological activity of the multibinding compound. The linker may be chosen to enhance the biological activity of the molecule. In general, the linker may be chosen from any organic molecule construct that orients two or more ligands to their ligand binding sites to permit multivalency. In this regard, the linker can be considered as a "framework" on which the ligands are arranged in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding compound.
For example, different orientations can be achieved by including in the framework groups containing mono- or polycyclic groups, including aryl and/or heteroaryl groups, or structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (alkenyl, alkenylene, alkynyl or alkynylene groups). Other groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the ring is a six or ten member ring. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aromatic ring such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
Different hydrophobic/hydrophilic characteristics of the linker as well as the presence or absence of charged moieties can readily be controlled by the skilled artisan. For example, the hydrophobic nature of a linker derived from hexamethylene diamine (H2N(CH2)6NH2) or related polyamines can be modified to be substantially more hydrophilic by replacing the alkylene group with a poly(oxyalkylene) group such as found in the commercially available "Jeffamines".
Different frameworks can be designed to provide preferred orientations of the ligands. Such frameworks may be represented by using an array of dots (as shown below) wherein each dot may potentially be an atom, such as C, O, N, S, P, H, F, Cl, Br, and F or the dot may alternatively indicate the absence of an atom at that position. To facilitate the understanding of the framework structure, the framework is illustrated as a two dimensional array in the following diagram, although clearly the framework is a three dimensional array in practice:
8 7 6
5 4
3 2
1 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Each dot is either an atom, chosen from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or halogen, or the dot represents a point in space (i.e., an absence of an atom). As is apparent to the skilled artisan, only certain atoms on the grid have the ability to act as an attachment point for the ligands, namely, C, O, N, S and P.
Atoms can be connected to each other via bonds (single, double or triple bonds with acceptable resonance and tautomeric forms), with regard to the usual constraints of chemical bonding. Ligands may be attached to the framework via single, double or triple bonds (with chemically acceptable tautomeric and resonance forms). Multiple ligand groups (2 to 10) can be attached to the framework such that the minimal, shortest path distance between adjacent ligand groups does not exceed 100 atoms. Preferably, the linker connections to the ligand is selected such that the maximum spatial distance between two adjacent ligands is no more than 100A. An example of a linker as presented by the grid is shown below for a biphenyl construct.
Figure imgf000072_0001
Nodes (1,2), (2,0), (4,4), (5,2), (4,0), (6,2), (7,4), (9,4), (10,2), (9,0). (7,0) all represent carbon atoms. Node (10,0) represents a chlorine atom. All other nodes (or dots) are points in space (i.e., represent an absence of atoms). Nodes (1,2) and (9,4) are attachment points. Hydrogen atoms are affixed to nodes (2,4), (4,4), (4,0), (2,0), (7,4), (10,2) and (7,0). Nodes (5,2) and (6,2) are connected by a single bond.
The carbon atoms present are connected by either a single or double bonds, taking into consideration the principle of resonance and/or tautomerism.
The intersection of the framework (linker) and the ligand group, and indeed, the framework (linker) itself can have many different bonding patterns. Examples of acceptable patterns of three contiguous atom arrangements are shown in the following diagram:
CCC NCC OCC SCC pre
CCN NCN OCN SCN pfN
CCO NCO OCO SCO pen
CCS NCS OCS SCS PCS
CCP NCP OCP SCP pep
CNC NNC ONC SNC PNC CNN NNN ONN SNN PMN
CNO NNO ONO S ΓΌ P NO
CNS NNS CTT S" SNS PNS
CNP rTTTF ONP SNP PN p
Figure imgf000073_0001
One skilled in the art would be able to identify bonding patterns that would produce multivalent compounds. Methods for producing these bonding arrangements are described in March, "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 4th Edition. Wiley-Interscience, New York, New York (1992). These arrangements are described in the grid of dots shown in the scheme above. All of the possible arrangements for the five most preferred atoms are shown. Each atom has a variety of acceptable oxidation states. The bonding arrangements underlined are less acceptable and are not preferred.
Examples of molecular structures in which the above bonding patterns could be employed as components of the linker are shown below.
Figure imgf000074_0001
The identification of an appropriate framework geometry and size for ligand domain presentation are important steps in the construction of a multibinding compound with enhanced activity. Systematic spatial searching strategies can be used to aid in the identification of preferred frameworks through an-iterative process. Figure 4 illustrates a useful strategy for determining an optimal framework display orientation for ligand domains. Various other strategies are known to those skilled in the art of molecular design and can be used for preparing compounds of this invention. As shown in Figure 3, display vectors around similar central core structures such as a phenyl structure (Panel A) and a cyclohexane structure (Panel B) can be varied, as can the spacing of the ligand domain from the core structure (i.e., the length of the attaching moiety). It is to be noted that core structures other than those shown here can be used for determining the optimal framework display orientation of the ligands. The process may require the use of multiple copies of the same central core structure or combinations of different types of display cores. The above-described process can be extended to trimers (Figure 3) and compound of higher valency. (Figure 4) Assays of each of the individual compounds of a collection generated as described above will lead to a subset of compounds with the desired enhanced activities (e.g., potency, selectivity, etc.). The analysis of this subset using a technique such as Ensemble Molecular Dynamics will provide a framework orientation that favors the properties desired. A wide diversity of linkers is commercially available (see, e.g., Available Chemical Directory (ACD)). Many of the linkers that are suitable for use in this invention fall into this category. Other can be readily synthesized by methods well known in the art and/or are described below.
Having selected a preferred framework geometry, the physical properties of the linker can be optimized by varying the chemical composition thereof. The composition of the linker can be varied in numerous ways to achieve the desired physical properties for the multibinding compound.
It can therefore be seen that there is a plethora of possibilities for the composition of a linker. Examples of linkers include aliphatic moieties, aromatic moieties, steroidal moieties, peptides, and the like. Specific examples are peptides or polyamides, hydrocarbons, aromatic groups, ethers, lipids, cationic or anionic groups, or a combination thereof.
Examples are given below, but it should be understood that various changes may be made and equivalents may be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. For example, properties of the linker can be modified by the addition or insertion of ancillary groups into or onto the linker, for example, to change the solubility of the multibinding compound (in water, fats, lipids, biological fluids, etc.), hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, linker flexibility, antigenicity, stability, and the like. For example, the introduction of one or more poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) groups onto or into the linker enhances the hydrophilicity and water solubility of the multibinding compound, increases both molecular weight and molecular size and, depending on the nature of the unPEGylated linker, may increase the in vivo retention time. Further PEG may decrease antigenicity and potentially enhances the overall rigidity of the linker. Ancillary groups which enhance the water solubility/hydrophilicity of the linker and, accordingly, the resulting multibinding compounds are useful in practicing this invention. Thus, it is within the scope of the present invention to use ancillary groups such as, for example, small repeating units of ethylene glycols, alcohols, polyols (e.g., glycerin, glycerol propoxylate, saccharides, including mono- , oligosaccharides, etc.), carboxylates (e.g., small repeating units of glutamic acid, acrylic acid, etc.), amines (e.g., tetraethylenepentamine), and the like) to enhance the water solubility and/or hydrophilicity of the multibinding compounds of this invention. In preferred embodiments, the ancillary group used to improve water solubility/hydrophilicity will be a polyether . The incorporation of lipophilic ancillary groups within the structure of the linker to enhance the lipophilicity and/or hydrophobicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. Lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include, by way of example only, aryl and heteroaryl groups which, as above, may be either unsubstituted or substituted with other groups, but are at least substituted with a group which allows their covalent attachment to the linker. Other lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include fatty acid derivatives which do not form bilayers in aqueous medium until higher concentrations are reached.
Also within the scope of this invention is the use of ancillary groups which result in the multibinding compound being incorporated or anchored into a vesicle or other membranous structure such as a liposome or a micelle. The term "lipid" refers to any fatty acid derivative that is capable of forming a bilayer or a micelle such that a hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients toward the bilayer while a hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Hydrophilic characteristics derive from the presence of phosphato, carboxylic, sulfato, amino, sulfhydryl, nitro and other like groups well known in the art. Hydrophobicity could be conferred by the inclusion of groups that include, but are not limited to, long chain saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups of up to 20 carbon atoms and such groups substituted by one or more aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and/or heterocyclic group(s). Preferred lipids are phosphglycerides and sphingolipids, representative examples of which include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyleoyl phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidyl-ethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, distearoyl-phosphatidylcholine or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine could be used. Other compounds lacking phosphorus, such as sphingolipid and glycosphingolipid families are also within the group designated as lipid. Additionally, the amphipathic lipids described above may be mixed with other lipids including triglycerides and sterols. The flexibility of the linker can be manipulated by the inclusion of ancillary groups which are bulky and/or rigid. The presence of bulky or rigid groups can hinder free rotation about bonds in the linker or bonds between the linker and the ancillary group(s) or bonds between the linker and the functional groups. Rigid groups can include, for example, those groups whose conformational lability is restrained by the presence of rings and/or multiple bonds within the group, for example, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. and heterocyclic groups. Other groups which can impart rigidity include polypeptide groups such as oligo- or polyproline chains.
Rigidity can also be imparted electrostatically. Thus, if the ancillary groups are either positively or negatively charged, the similarly charged ancillary groups will force the presenter linker into a configuration affording the maximum distance between each of the like charges. The energetic cost of bringing the like-charged groups closer to each other will tend to hold the linker in a configuration that maintains the separation between the like-charged ancillary groups. Further ancillary groups bearing opposite charges will tend to be attracted to their oppositely charged counterparts and potentially may enter into both inter- and intramolecular ionic bonds. This non-covalent mechanism will tend to hold the linker into a conformation which allows bonding between the oppositely charged groups. The addition of ancillary groups which are charged, or alternatively, bear a latent charge when deprotected, following addition to the linker, include deprotectation of a carboxyl, hydroxyl, thiol or amino group by a change in pH, oxidation, reduction or other mechanisms known to those skilled in the art which result in removal of the protecting group, is within the scope of this invention. Rigidity may also be imparted by internal hydrogen bonding or by hydrophobic collapse.
Bulky groups can include, for example, large atoms, ions (e.g., iodine, sulfur, metal ions, etc.) or groups containing large atoms, polycyclic groups, including aromatic groups, non-aromatic groups and structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (i.e., alkenes and alkynes). Bulky groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. Species that are branched are expected to increase the rigidity of the structure more per unit molecular weight gain than are straight-chain species.
In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the linker comprises one or more six-membered rings. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aryl group such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
In view of the above, it is apparent that the appropriate selection of a linker group providing suitable orientation, restricted/unrestricted rotation, the desired degree of hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity, etc. is well within the skill of the art. Eliminating or reducing antigenicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. In certain cases, the antigenicity of a multibinding compound may be eliminated or reduced by use of groups such as, for example, poly(ethylene glycol). As explained above, the multibinding compounds described herein comprise
2-10 ligands attached to a linker that attaches the ligands in such a manner that they are presented to the enzyme for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites thereon therein. The linker spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker. This and other factors increases the biological activity of the multibinding compound as compared to the same number of ligands made available in monobinding form.
The compounds of this invention are preferably represented by the empirical Formula (L)p(X)q where L, X, p and q are as defined above. This is intended to include the several ways in which the ligands can be linked together in order to achieve the objective of multivalency, and a more detailed explanation is described below.
As noted previously, the linker may be considered as a framework to which ligands are attached. Thus, it should be recognized that the ligands can be attached at any suitable position on this framework, for example, at the termini of a linear chain or at any intermediate position.
The simplest and most preferred multibinding compound is a bivalent compound which can be represented as L-X-L, where each L is independently a ligand which may be the same or different and each X is independently the linker. Examples of such bivalent compounds are provided in FIG. 1 where each shaded circle represents a ligand. A trivalent compound could also be represented in a linear fashion, i.e., as a sequence of repeated units L-X-L-X-L, in which L is a ligand and is the same or different at each occurrence, as can X. However, a trimer can also be a radial multibinding compound comprising three ligands attached to a central core, and thus represented as (L)3X, where the linker X could include, for example, an aryl or cycloalkyl group. Illustrations of trivalent and tetravalent compounds of this invention are found in FIGs 2 and 3 respectively where, again, the shaded circles represent ligands. Tetravalent compounds can be represented in a linear array, e.g.,
L-X-L-X-L-X-L
in a branched array, e.g.,
L-X-L-X-L
(a branched construct analogous to the isomers of butane — /7-butyl, iso-butyl, sec- butyl, and t-butyl) or in a tetrahedral array, e.g..
Figure imgf000080_0001
where X and L are as defined herein. Alternatively, it could be represented as an alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl derivative as above with four (4) ligands attached to the core linker. The same considerations apply to higher multibinding compounds of this invention containing 5-10 ligands as illustrated in FIG. 4 where, as before, the shaded circles represent ligands. However, for multibinding agents attached to a central linker such as aryl or cycloalkyl, there is a self-evident constraint that there must be sufficient attachment sites on the linker to accommodate the number of ligands present; for example, a benzene ring could not directly accommodate more than 6 ligands, whereas a multi-ring linker (e.g., biphenyl) could accommodate a larger number of ligands. The above described compounds may alternatively be represented as cyclic chains of the form:
X X
and variants thereof.
All of the above variations are intended to be within the scope of the invention defined by the Formula (L)p(X)q.
With the foregoing in mind, a preferred linker may be represented by the following formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Yb-Z-Xa-
in which: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -C(O)NR-. -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene. heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
Ya and Yb at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)O-, -NR-, -S(O)n-, -C(O)NR'-, -NR' C(O)-, -NR' C(O)NR'-, -NR C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR'-. -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(0)-NR'-. -NR'- C(O)-O-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -O-P(O)(OR')-, - S(O)nCR' R"-, -S(O)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(O)n -. -S-S-, and a covalent bond: where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
Additionally, the linker moiety can be optionally substituted at any atom therein by one or more alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic group.
In one embodiment of this invention, the linker (i.e., X, X' or X") is selected those shown in Table II:
Table II Representative Linkers
Linker
-(CH2)n - where n is an integer of from 2-10
-(CH2) 2-0-(CH2)2-O-(CH2) 2-
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 1 ,4-phenylene
-(CHCO2Et)-(CH2)2-(CHCO2Et)-
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 2,3-quinoxaline
-(CH2)-(CH=CH)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)-C(O)-C(O)-(CH2)-
-(CH2) -(C≡C)-(CH2)-
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 1 ,2-phenylene
-(CH2)-C(O)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)-CH(COOH)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)-CH(COOEt)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)-CH(OH)-(CH2)-
-CH(CH3)-(CH2)-
-CH(CN)-(CH2)- Linker
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 2,6-pyridyl
-(CH2)-C(=CH2)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)-CH(OH)-CH(OH)-(CH2)-
-(CH2)2-N(CH3)-(CH2)2-
-(CH2)2-O-(CH2)2-
-(CH2)-Z-(CH2)- where Z is 4-biphenyl
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 1 ,2-phenylene
-CH2-Z-CH2- where Z is 1,3-phenylene
-CH2-O-C(O)-NH-Z-NH-C(O)-O-CH2- where Z is 1,3-phenylene
-CH2-O-C(O)-(CH2)8-C(O)-O-CH2-
-CH2-O-C(O)-(CH2)10-C(O)-O-CH2
-CH2-O-C(O)-Z-C(O)-O-CH2- where Z is 1,3-phenylene
-CH2-O-C(O)-(CH2)6-C(O)-O-CH2-
-CH2-O-C(O)-Z-C(O)-O-CH2- where Z is 1 ,4-phenylene
-CH2-O-C(O)-Z-C(O)-O-CH2- where Z is 2,3-(5-norbornene)
In view of the above description of the linker, it is understood that the term "linker" when used in combination with the term "multibinding compound" includes both a covalently contiguous single linker (e.g.. L-X-L) and multiple covalently non-contiguous linkers (L-X-L-X-L) within the multibinding compound.
Combinatorial Libraries The methods described above lend themselves to combinatorial approaches for identifying multimeric compounds which possess multibinding properties. Specifically, factors such as the proper juxtaposition of the individual ligands of a multibinding compound with respect to the relevant array of binding sites on a target or targets is important in optimizing the interaction of the multibinding compound with its target(s) and to maximize the biological advantage through multivalency. One approach is to identify a library of candidate multibinding compounds with properties spanning the multibinding parameters that are relevant for a particular target. These parameters include: (1) the identity of ligand(s), (2) the orientation of ligands, (3) the valency of the construct, (4) linker length, (5) linker geometry, (6) linker physical properties, and (7) linker chemical functional groups.
Libraries of multimeric compounds potentially possessing multibinding properties (i.e., candidate multibinding compounds) and comprising a multiplicity of such variables are prepared and these libraries are then evaluated via conventional assays corresponding to the ligand selected and the multibinding parameters desired. Considerations relevant to each of these variables are set forth below:
Selection of ligand(s : A single ligand or set of ligands is (are) selected for incorporation into the libraries of candidate multibinding compounds which library is directed against a particular biological target or targets, i.e., antagonism of a muscarinic receptor. The only requirement for the ligands chosen is that they are capable of interacting with the selected target(s). Thus, ligands may be known drugs, modified forms of known drugs, substructures of known drugs or substrates of modified forms of known drugs (which are competent to interact with the target), or other compounds. Ligands are preferably chosen based on known favorable properties that may be projected to be carried over to or amplified in multibinding forms. Favorable properties include demonstrated safety and efficacy in human patients, appropriate PK ADME profiles, synthetic accessibility, and desirable physical properties such as solubility, log P, etc. However, it is crucial to note that ligands which display an unfavorable property from among the previous list may obtain a more favorable property through the process of multibinding compound formation; i.e., ligands should not necessarily be excluded on such a basis. For example, a ligand that is not sufficiently potent at a particular target so as to be efficacious in a human patient may become highly potent and efficacious when presented in multibinding form. A ligand that is potent and efficacious but not of utility because of a non- mechanism-related toxic side effect may have increased therapeutic index (increased potency relative to toxicity) as a multibinding compound. Compounds that exhibit short in vivo half-lives may have extended half-lives as multibinding compounds. Physical properties of ligands that limit their usefulness (e.g. poor bioavailability due to low solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity) may be rationally modulated in multibinding forms, providing compounds with physical properties consistent with the desired utility. Orientation: selection of ligand attachment points and linking chemistry
Several points are chosen on each ligand at which to attach the ligand to the linker. The selected points on the ligand/linker for attachment are functionalized to contain complementary reactive functional groups. This permits probing the effects of presenting the ligands to their receptor(s) in multiple relative orientations, an important multibinding design parameter. The only requirement for choosing attachment points is that attaching to at least one of these points does not abrogate activity of the ligand. Such points for attachment can be identified by structural information when available. For example, inspection of a co-crystal structure of a protease inhibitor bound to its target allows one to identify one or more sites where linker attachment will not preclude the enzyme inhibitor interaction. Alternatively, evaluation of ligand/target binding by nuclear magnetic resonance will permit the identification of sites non-essential for ligand/target binding. See, for example, Fesik, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,891,643. When such structural information is not available, utilization of structure-activity relationships (SAR) for ligands will suggest positions where substantial structural variations are and are not allowed. In the absence of both structural and SAR information, a library is merely selected with multiple points of attachment to allow presentation of the ligand in multiple distinct orientations. Subsequent evaluation of this library will indicate what positions are suitable for attachment. It is important to emphasize that positions of attachment that do abrogate the activity of the monomeric ligand may also be advantageously included in candidate multibinding compounds in the library provided that such compounds bear at least one ligand attached in a manner which does not abrogate intrinsic activity. This selection derives from, for example, heterobivalent interactions within the context of a single target molecule. For example, consider a receptor antagonist ligand bound to its target receptor, and then consider modifying this ligand by attaching to it a second copy of the same ligand with a linker which allows the second ligand to interact with the same receptor molecule at sites proximal to the antagonist binding site, which include elements of the receptor that are not part of the formal antagonist binding site and/or elements of the matrix surrounding the receptor such as the membrane. Here, the most favorable orientation for interaction of the second ligand molecule with the receptor/matrix may be achieved by attaching it to the linker at a position which abrogates activity of the ligand at the formal antagonist binding site. Another way to consider this is that the SAR of individual ligands within the context of a multibinding structure is often different from the SAR of those same ligands in momomeric form.
The foregoing discussion focused on bivalent interactions of dimeric compounds bearing two copies of the same ligand joined to a single linker through different attachment points, one of which may abrogate the binding/activity of the monomeric ligand. It should also be understood that bivalent advantage may also be attained with heterodimeric constructs bearing two different ligands that bind to common or different targets. For example, a 5HT4 receptor antagonist and a bladder-selective muscarinic M3 antagonist may be joined to a linker through attachment points which do not abrogate the binding affinity of the monomeric ligands for their respective receptor sites. The dimeric compound may achieve enhanced affinity for both receptors due to favorable interactions between the 5HT4 ligand and elements of the M3 receptor proximal to the formal M3 antagonist binding site and between the M3 ligand and elements of the 5HT4 receptor proximal to the formal 5HT4 antagonist binding site. Thus, the dimeric compound may be more potent and selective antagonist of overactive bladder and a superior therapy for urinary urge incontinence.
Once the ligand attachment points have been chosen, one identifies the types of chemical linkages that are possible at those points. The most preferred types of chemical linkages are those that are compatible with the overall structure of the ligand (or protected forms of the ligand) readily and generally formed, stable and intrinsically inocuous under typical chemical and physiological conditions, and compatible with a large number of available linkers. Amide bonds, ethers, amines, carbamates, ureas, and sulfonamides are but a few examples of preferred linkages. Linkers: spanning relevant multibinding parameters through selection of valency. linker length, linker geometry, rigidity, physical properties, and chemical functional groups
In the library of linkers employed to generate the library of candidate multibinding compounds, the selection of linkers employed in this library of linkers takes into consideration the following factors: Valency:
In most instances the library of linkers is initiated with divalent linkers. The choice of ligands and proper juxtaposition of two ligands relative to their binding sites permits such molecules to exhibit target binding affinities and specificities more than sufficient to confer biological advantage. Furthermore, divalent linkers or constructs are also typically of modest size such that they retain the desirable biodistribution properties of small molecules. Linker length:
Linkers are chosen in a range of lengths to allow the spanning of a range of inter-ligand distances that encompass the distance preferable for a given divalent interaction. In some instances the preferred distance can be estimated rather precisely from high-resolution structural information of targets, typically enzymes and soluble receptor targets. In other instances where high-resolution structural information is not available (such as 7TM G-protein coupled receptors), one can make use of simple models to estimate the maximum distance between binding sites either on adjacent receptors or at different locations on the same receptor. In situations where two binding sites are present on the same target (or target subunit for multisubunit targets), preferred linker distances are 2-20 A, with more preferred linker distances of 3-12 A. In situations where two binding sites reside on separate (e.g., protein) target sites, preferred linker distances are 20-100 A, with more preferred distances of 30-70 A. Linker geometry and rigidity:
The combination of ligand attachment site, linker length, linker geometry, and linker rigidity determine the possible ways in which the ligands of candidate multibinding compounds may be displayed in three dimensions and thereby presented to their binding sites. Linker geometry and rigidity are nominally determined by chemical composition and bonding pattern, which may be controlled and are systematically varied as another spanning function in a multibinding array. For example, linker geometry is varied by attaching two ligands to the ortho, meta, and para positions of a benzene ring, or in cis- or trans-arrangements at the 1,1- vs. 1,2- vs. 1,3- vs. 1,4- positions around a cyclohexane core or in cis- or trans- arrangements at a point of ethylene unsaturation. Linker rigidity is varied by controlling the number and relative energies of different conformational states possible for the linker. For example, a divalent compound bearing two ligands joined by 1,8-octyl linker has many more degrees of freedom, and is therefore less rigid than a compound in which the two ligands are attached to the 4,4' positions of a biphenyl linker. Linker physical properties:
The physical properties of linkers are nominally determined by the chemical constitution and bonding patterns of the linker, and linker physical properties impact the overall physical properties of the candidate multibinding compounds in which they are included. A range of linker compositions is typically selected to provide a range of physical properties (hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, amphiphilicity, polarization, acidity, and basicity) in the candidate multibinding compounds. The particular choice of linker physical properties is made within the context of the physical properties of the ligands they join and preferably the goal is to generate molecules with favorable PK/ADME properties. For example, linkers can be selected to avoid those that are too hydrophilic or too hydrophobic to be readily absorbed and/or distributed in vivo. Linker chemical functional groups:
Linker chemical functional groups are selected to be compatible with the chemistry chosen to connect linkers to the ligands and to impart the range of physical properties sufficient to span initial examination of this parameter.
Combinatorial synthesis:
Having chosen a set of n ligands (n being determined by the sum of the number of different attachment points for each ligand chosen) and m linkers by the process outlined above, a library of (n )m candidate divalent multibinding compounds is prepared which spans the relevant multibinding design parameters for a particular target. For example, an array generated from two ligands, one which has two attachment points (Al, A2) and one which has three attachment points (Bl, B2, B3) joined in all possible combinations provide for at least 15 possible combinations of multibinding compounds:
Al-Al A1-A2 Al-Bl A1-B2 A1-B3 A2-A2 A2-B1 A2-B2 A2-B3 Bl-Bl B1-B2 B1-B3 B2-B2 B2-B3 B3-B3
When each of these combinations is joined by 10 different linkers, a library of 150 candidate multibinding compounds results. Given the combinatorial nature of the library, common chemistries are preferably used to join the reactive functionalies on the ligands with complementary reactive functionalities on the linkers. The library therefore lends itself to efficient parallel synthetic methods. The combinatorial library can employ solid phase chemistries well known in the art wherein the ligand and/or linker is attached to a solid support. Alternatively and preferably, the combinatorial libary is prepared in the solution phase. After synthesis, candidate multibinding compounds are optionally purified before assaying for activity by, for example, chromatographic methods (e.g., HPLC).
Analysis of array by biochemical, analytical, pharmacological, and computational methods:
Various methods are used to characterize the properties and activities of the candidate multibinding compounds in the library to determine which compounds possess multibinding properties. Physical constants such as solubility under various solvent conditions and logD/clogD values can be determined. A combination of NMR spectroscopy and computational methods is used to determine low-energy conformations of the candidate multibinding compounds in fluid media. The ability of the members of the library to bind to the desired target and other targets is determined by various standard methods, which include radioligand displacement assays for receptor and ion channel targets, and kinetic inhibition analysis for many enzyme targets. In vitro efficacy, such as for receptor agonists and antagonists, ion channel blockers, and antimicrobial activity, can also be determined. Pharmacological data, including oral absoφtion, everted gut penetration, other pharmacokinetic parameters and efficacy data can be determined in appropriate models. In this way, key structure-activity relationships are obtained for multibinding design parameters which are then used to direct future work.
The members of the library which exhibit multibinding properties, as defined herein, can be readily determined by conventional methods. First those members which exhibit multibinding properties are identified by conventional methods as described above including conventional assays (both in vitro and in vivo).
Second, ascertaining the structure of those compounds which exhibit multibinding properties can be accomplished via art recognized procedures. For example, each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time. See, for example, Dower, et al., International Patent Application Publication No. WO 93/06121; Brenner, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 89:5181 (1992); Gallop, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,846,839; each of which are incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Alternatively, the structure of relevant multivalent compounds can also be determined from soluble and untagged libaries of candidate multivalent compounds by methods known in the art such as those described by Hindsgaul, et al., Canadian Patent Application No. 2,240,325 which was published on July 1 1, 1998. Such methods couple frontal affinity chromatography with mass spectroscopy to determine both the structure and relative binding affinities of candidate multibinding compounds to receptors. The process set forth above for dimeric candidate multibinding compounds can, of course, be extended to trimeric candidate compounds and higher analogs thereof. Follow-up synthesis and analysis of additional array(s):
Based on the information obtained through analysis of the initial library, an optional component of the process is to ascertain one or more promising multibinding "lead" compounds as defined by particular relative ligand orientations, linker lengths, linker geometries, etc. Additional libraries can then be generated around these leads to provide for further information regarding structure to activity relationships. These arrays typically bear more focused variations in linker structure in an effort to further optimize target affinity and/or activity at the target (antagonism, partial agonism, etc.), and/or alter physical properties. By iterative redesign/analysis using the novel principles of multibinding design along with classical medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, and pharmacology approaches, one is able to prepare and identify optimal multibinding compounds that exhibit biological advantage towards their targets and as therapeutic agents.
To further elaborate upon this procedure, suitable divalent linkers include, by way of example only, those derived from dicarboxylic acids, disulfonylhalides, dialdehydes, diketones, dihalides, diisocyanates.diamines. diols, mixtures of carboxylic acids, sulfonylhalides, aldehydes, ketones, halides, isocyanates, amines and diols. In each case, the carboxylic acid, sulfonylhalide, aldehyde, ketone, halide, isocyanate, amine and diol functional group is reacted with a complementary functionality on the ligand to form a covalent linkage. Such complementary functionality is well known in the art as illustrated in the following table:
COMPLEMENTARY BINDING CHEMISTRIES
First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide β-amine hydroxyamine sulfonyl halide sulfonamide carboxyl acid amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine/NaCNBH3 amine ketone amine/NaCNBH3 amine amine isocyanate urea
Exemplary linkers include the following linkers identified as X-1 through X- 418 as set forth below:
Diacids
Figure imgf000093_0001
—91/1—
Figure imgf000094_0001
X-28 X-JO
Figure imgf000094_0002
—91/2—
Figure imgf000095_0001
X-47 X-48 —91/3—
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000096_0002
X-50
Figure imgf000096_0003
X-53 X-54
Figure imgf000096_0004
Chiral
X-61 X-62 -91/4—
Figure imgf000097_0001
X-77 X-78
Figure imgf000097_0002
—91/5—
Figure imgf000098_0001
—92—
Figure imgf000099_0002
X-92
Figure imgf000099_0003
—92/1—
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000100_0002
Figure imgf000100_0003
Figure imgf000100_0004
Figure imgf000101_0001
X-123 —92/3—
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000102_0002
X-141 —92/4—
Figure imgf000103_0001
- —
Figure imgf000104_0001
X-175
■ Br
Br^y^Br Br' ■I OH OH
X-178 X-179 X-180 — —
Figure imgf000105_0001
-93 2-
Figure imgf000106_0001
__ __
Figure imgf000107_0001
—94/1—
Figure imgf000108_0001
Figure imgf000108_0002
X-255 X-257
Figure imgf000108_0003
— —
Figure imgf000109_0001
—94 3—
Figure imgf000110_0001
X-285
Figure imgf000110_0002
X-286 X-287
Figure imgf000110_0003
X-292
H2N. ■0- ■0- NH 2
Figure imgf000110_0004
— —
Figure imgf000111_0001
X-306
Figure imgf000111_0002
—95—
Figure imgf000112_0001
X-320
Figure imgf000112_0002
X-323 X-324 X-325
Figure imgf000112_0003
—95/1—
Figure imgf000113_0001
X-344 -95/2—
Figure imgf000114_0001
X-346
Figure imgf000114_0002
OH
X-347 X-348 X-349
Figure imgf000114_0003
-95/3—
Figure imgf000115_0001
X-361 X-362
Figure imgf000115_0002
X-366 X-367
Figure imgf000115_0003
—95/4—
Figure imgf000116_0001
X-379 X-380
Figure imgf000116_0002
X-381 X-382 X-383
Figure imgf000116_0003
X-385
Dithiols
Figure imgf000116_0004
X-386 X-387 χ_388
SH
Figure imgf000116_0005
X-390 -96-
Figure imgf000117_0001
X-392 X-394
Figure imgf000117_0002
X-404 X-405 X-406
Figure imgf000117_0003
X-47 -97-
Representative ligands for use in this invention include, by way of example, L-l through L-8 wherein L-l is selected from a compound of formula (a) L-2 is selected from a compound of formula (b), L-3 is selected from a compound of formula (c), L-4 is selected from a compound of formula (d), L-5 is selected from a compound of formula (e), L-6 is selected from a compound of formula (f), L-7 is selected from a compound of formula (g), and L-8 is selected from a compound of formula (h) provided that at least one of the ligands is selected from ligands L-l through L-5.
Combinations of ligands (L) and linkers (X) per this invention include, by way example only, homo- and hetero-dimers wherein a first ligand is selected from L-l through L-5 and the second ligand and linker is selected from the following:
L-l/X-l- L-l/X-2- L-l/X-3- L-l/X-4- L-l/X-5- L-l/X-6-
L-l/X-7- L- l/X-8- L- l/X-9- L-l/X-10- L-l/X-1 1 - L-l/X- 12-
L-l/X-13- L-l/X-14- L- l/X-15- L-l/X-16- L-l/X-17- L-l/X- 18-
L-l/X-19- L-l/X-20- L-l/X-21 - L- l/X-22- L-l/X-23- L-l/X-24-
L-l/X-25- L-l/X-26- L-l/X-27- L-l/X-28- L-l/X-29- L-l/X-30-
L-l/X-31- L-l/X-32- L-l/X-33- L-l/X-34- L- l/X-35- L- l/X-36-
L-l/X-37- L-l/X-38- L-l/X-39- L-l/X-40- L-l/X-41 - L-l/X-42-
L-l/X-43- L-l/X-44- L-l/X-45- L-l/X-46- L-l/X-47- L-l/X-48-
L-l X-49- L-l/X-50- L-l/X-51 - L-l/X-52- L-l/X-53- L-l/X-54-
L-l/X-55- L-l/X-56- L-l/X-57- L-l/X-58- L-l/X-59- L-l/X-60-
L-l/X-61- L-l/X-62- L-l/X-63- L-l/X-64- L-l/X-65- L-l/X-66-
L-l/X-67- L-l/X-68- L-l/X-69- L-l/X-70- L-l/X-71- L-l/X-72-
L-l/X-73- L-l/X-74- L-l/X-75- L-l/X-76- L-l/X-77- L- l/X-78-
L-l/X-79- L-l/X-80- L-l/X-81- L-l/X-82- L-l/X-83- L- l/X-84-
L-l/X-85- L-l/X-86- L-l/X-87- L-l/X-88- L-l/X-89- L-l/X-90-
L-l/X-91 - L-l/X-92- L- l/X-93- L- l/X-94- L-l/X-95- L-l/X-96-
L-l/X-97- L-l/X-98- L-l/X-99- L-l/X-100- L-l/X-101 - L-l/X-102-
L-l/X-103- L-l/X-104- L-l/X-105- L-l/X-106- L-l/X-107- L-l/X-108-
L-l/X-109- L-l/X-1 10- L-l/X-1 1 1- L-l/X-1 12- L-l/X- 1 13- L-l/X-1 14-
L-l/X-1 15- L-l/X-1 16- L-l/X-1 17- L-l/X-118- L-l/X-1 19- L-l/X-120-
L-l/X-121- L- l/X-122- L-l/X-123- L-l/X-124- L-l/X-125- L-l X-126- -98-
L-l/X-127- L-l/X-128- L-l/X-129- L-l/X-130- L-l/X-131- L-l/X-132- L-l/X-133- L-l/X-134- L-l/X-135- L-l/X-136- L-l/X-137- L-l/X-138- L-l/X-139- L-l/X-140- L-l/X-141- L-L'X-142- L-l/X-143- L-l/X-144- L-l/X-145- L-l/X-146- L-l/X-147- L-l/X-148- L-l/X-149- L-l/X-150- L-l/X-151- L-l/X-152- L-l/X-153- L-l/X-154- L-l/X-155- L-l/X-156- L-l/X-157- L-l/X-158- L-l/X-159- L-l/X-160- L-l/X-161- L-l/X-162- L-l/X-163- L-l/X-164- L-l/X-165- L-l/X-166- L-l/X-167- L-l/X-168- L-l/X-169- L-l/X-170- L-l/X-171- L-l/X-172- L-l/X-173- L-l/X-174- L-l/X-175- L-l/X-176- L-l/X-177- L-l/X-178- L-l/X-179- L-l/X-180- L-l/X-181- L-l/X-182- L-1./X-183- L-l/X-184- L-l/X-185- L-l/X-186- L-l/X-187- L-l/X-188- L-l/X-189- L-l/X-190- L-l/X-191- L-l/X-192- L-l/X-193- L-l/X-194- L-l/X-195- L-l/X-196- L-l/X-197- L-l/X-198- L-l/X-199- L-l/X-200- L-l/X-201- L-l/X-202- L-l/X-203- L-l/X-204- L-l/X-205- L-l/X-206- L-l/X-207- L-l/X-208- L-l/X-209- L-l/X-210- L-l/X-211- L-l/X-212- L-l/X-213- L-l/X-214- L-l/X-215- L-l/X-216- L-l/X-217- L-l/X-218- L-l/X-219- L-l/X-220- L-l/X-221- L-l/X-222- L-l/X-223- L-l/X-224- L-l/X-225- L-l/X-226- L-l/X-227- L-l/X-228- L-l/X-229- L-l/X-230- L-l/X-231- L-l/X-232- L-l/X-233- L-l/X-234- L-l/X-235- L-l/X-236- L-l/X-237- L-l/X-238- L-l/X-239- L-l/X-240- L-l/X-241- L-l/X-242- L-l/X-243- L-l/X-244- L-l/X-245- L-l/X-246- L-l/X-247- L-l/X-248- L-l/X-249- L-l/X-250- L-l/X-251- L-l/X-252- L-l/X-253- L-l/X-254- L-l/X-255- L-l/X-256- L-l/X-257- L-l/X-258- L-l/X-259- L-l/X-260- L-l/X-261- L-l/X-262- L-l/X-263- L-l/X-264- L-l/X-265- L-l/X-266- L-l/X-267- L-l/X-268- L-l/X-269- L-l/X-270- L-l/X-271- L-l/X-272- L-l/X-273- L-l/X-274- L-l/X-275- L-l/X-276- L-l/X-277- L-l/X-278- L-l/X-279- L-l/X-280- L-l/X-281- L-lX-282- L-l/X-283- L-l/X-284- L-lX-285- L-lX-286- L-l/X-287- L-l/X-288- L-l/X-289- L-l/X-290- L-l/X-291- L-l/X-292- L-l/X-293- L-l/X-294- L-l/X-295- L-l/X-296- L-l/X-297- L-l/X-298- L-l/X-299- L-l/X-300- L-lX-301- L-l/X-302- L-l/X-303- L-b'X-304- L-l/X-305- L-l/X-306- L-l/X-307- L-l/X-308- L-l/X-309- L-l/X-310- L-l/X-311- L-l/X-312- L-l/X-313- L-l/X-314- L-l/X-315- L-l/X-316- L-l/X-317- L-l/X-318- L-l/X-319- L-l/X-320- L-l/X-321- L-l/X-322- L-lX-323- L-l/X-324- L-l/X-325- L-l/X-326- L-l/X-327- L-l/X-328- L-l/X-329- L-l/X-330- L-l/X-331- L-l/X-332- L-l/X-333- L-l/X-334- -99-
L-l/X-335- L-l/X-336- L-l/X-337- L- l/X-338- L- l/X-339- L-l/X-340-
L-l/X-341- L-l/X-342- L-l/X-343- L- l/X-344- L-l/X-345- L-l/X-346-
L-l/X-347- L-l/X-348- L-l/X-349- L- l/X-350- L-l/X-351- L-l/X-352-
L-l/X-353- L-l/X-354- L-l/X-355- L-l/X-356- L-l/X-357- L-l/X-358- L-l/X-359- L-l/X-360- L-l/X-361- L-l/X-362- L-l/X-363- L-l/X-364-
L-l/X-365- L-l/X-366- L-l/X-367- L-l/X-368- L-l/X-369- L-l/X-370-
L-l/X-371- L-l/X-372- L-l/X-373- L- l/X-374- L-l/X-375- L-l/X-376-
L-l/X-377- L-l/X-378- L-l/X-379- L-l/X-380- L-l/X-381 - L-l/X-382-
L-l/X-383- L-l/X-384- L-l/X-385- L-l/X-386- L-l/X-387- L-l/X-388- L-l/X-389- L-l/X-390- L-l/X-391- L-l/X-392- L- l/X-393- L-l/X-394-
L-l/X-395- L-l/X-396- L-l/X-397- L- l/X-398- L- l/X-399- L- l X-400-
L-l/X-401 - L-l/X-402- L-l/X-403- L- l/X-404- L-l/X-405- L-l/X-406-
L-l/X-407- L-l/X-408- L- l/X-409- L-l/X-410- L-l/X-41 1- L-l/X-412-
L-l/X-413- L-l/X-414- L-l/X-415- L-l/X-416- L-l/X-417- L-l/X-418-
L-2/X-1- L-2/X-2- L-2/X-3- L-2/X-4- L-2/X-5- L-2/X-6-
L-2/X-7- L-2/X-8- L-2/X-9- L-2/X- 10- L-2/X-1 1 - L-2/X-12-
L-2/X-13- L-2/X-14- L-2/X-15- L-2/X-16- L-2/X-17- L-2/X- 18- L-2/X-19- L-2/X-20- L-2/X-21- L-2/X-22- L-2/X-23- L-2/X-24-
L-2/X-25- L-2/X-26- L-2/X-27- L-2/X-28- L-2/X-29- L-2/X-30-
L-2/X-31- L-2/X-32- L-2 X-33- L-2/X-34- L-2/X-35- L-2/X-36-
L-2/X-37- L-2/X-38- L-2/X-39- L-2/X-40- L-2/X-41 - L-2/X-42-
L-2/X-43- L-2/X-44- L-2/X-45- L-2/X-46- L-2/X-47- L-2/X-48- L-2/X-49- L-2/X-50- L-2/X-51- L-2/X-52- L-2/X-53- L-2/X-54-
L-2/X-55- L-2/X-56- L-2/X-57- L-2/X-58- L-2/X-59- L-2/X-60-
L-2/X-61- L-2/X-62- L-2/X-63- L-2/X-64- L-2/X-65- L-2/X-66-
L-2/X-67- L-2/X-68- L-2/X-69- L-2/X-70- L-2/X-71- L-2/X-72-
L-2/X-73- L-2/X-74- L-2/X-75- L-2/X-76- L-2/X-77- L-2/X-78- L-2/X-79- L-2/X-80- L-2 X-81- L-2/X-82- L-2/X-83- L-2/X-84-
L-2/X-85- L-2/X-86- L-2 X-87- L-2/X-88- L-2/X-89- L-2/X-90-
L-2/X-91- L-2/X-92- L-2/X-93- L-2/X-94- L-2/X-95- L-2/X-96-
L-2/X-97- L-2/X-98- L-2/X-99- L-2/X-100- L-2/X-101- L-2/X-102-
L-2/X-103- L-2 X-104- L-2/X-105- L-2/X-106- L-2/X-107- L-2/X-108- L-2/X-109- L-2/X-1 10- L-2/X-1 1 1- L-2/X-1 12- L-2/X-1 13- L-2/X-1 14- -100-
L-2/X-1 15- L-2/X-1 16- L-2/X-1 17- L-2/X-1 18- L-2/X-119- L-2/X-120-
L-2/X-121- L-2/X-122- L-2/X-123- L-2/X-124- L-2/X-125- L-2/X-126-
L-2/X-127- L-2/X-128- L-2/X-129- L-2/X-130- L-2/X-131- L-2/X-132-
L-2/X-133- L-2/X-134- L-2/X-135- L-2/X-136- L-2/X-137- L-2/X-138- L-2/X-139- L-2/X-140- L-2/X-141- L-2/X-142- L-2/X-143- L-2/X-144-
L-2/X-145- L-2/X-146- L-2/X-147- L-2/X-148- L-2/X-149- L-2/X-150-
L-2/X-151- L-2 X-152- L-2/X-153- L-2/X-154- L-2/X-155- L-2/X-156-
L-2/X-157- L-2/X-158- L-2/X-159- L-2/X-160- L-2/X-161- L-2/X-162-
L-2/X-163- L-2/X-164- L-2/X-165- L-2 X-166- L-2/X-167- L-2/X-168- L-2/X-169- L-2/X-170- L-2/X-171- L-2/X-172-
L-2/X-173- L-2/X-174- L-2/X-175- L-2/X-176- L-2/X-177- L-2/X-178-
L-2/X-179- L-2/X-180- L-2/X-181- L-2/X-182- L-2/X-183- L-2/X-184-
L-2/X-185- L-2/X-186- L-2/X-187- L-2/X-188- L-2/X-189- L-2/X-190-
L-2/X-191- L-2/X-192- L-2/X-193- L-2/X-194- L-2/X-195- L-2/X-196- L-2/X-197- L-2/X-198- L-2/X-199- L-2/X-200- L-2/X-201- L-2/X-202-
L-2/X-203- L-2/X-204- L-2/X-205- L-2/X-206- L-2/X-207- L-2/X-208-
L-2/X-209- L-2/X-210- L-2/X-21 1- L-2/X-212- L-2/X-213- L-2/X-214-
L-2/X-215- L-2/X-216- L-2/X-217- L-2/X-218- L-2/X-219- L-2/X-220-
L-2 X-221- L-2/X-222- L-2/X-223- L-2/X-224- L-2/X-225- L-2/X-226- L-2/X-227- L-2/X-228- L-2/X-229- L-2/X-230- L-2/X-231 - L-2/X-232-
L-2/X-233- L-2/X-234- L-2/X-235- L-2/X-236- L-2/X-237- L-2/X-238-
L-2/X-239- L-2/X-240- L-2/X-241- L-2/X-242- L-2/X-243- L-2/X-244-
L-2/X-245- L-2/X-246- L-2/X-247- L-2/X-248- L-2/X-249- L-2/X-250-
L-2/X-251 - L-2/X-252- L-2/X-253- L-2/X-254- L-2/X-255- L-2/X-256- L-2 X-257- L-2/X-258- L-2/X-259- L-2/X-260- L-2/X-261- L-2/X-262-
L-2/X-263- L-2/X-264- L-2/X-265- L-2/X-266- L-2/X-267- L-2/X-268-
L-2/X-269- L-2/X-270- L-2 X-271- L-2/X-272- L-2/X-273- L-2/X-274-
L-2/X-275- L-2/X-276- L-2/X-277- L-2/X-278- L-2/X-279- L-2/X-280-
L-2/X-281- L-2/X-282- L-2/X-283- L-2/X-284- L-2/X-285- L-2/X-286- L-2/X-287- L-2/X-288- L-2/X-289- L-2/X-290- L-2/X-291- L-2/X-292-
L-2/X-293- L-2/X-294- L-2/X-295- L-2/X-296- L-2/X-297- L-2/X-298-
L-2/X-299- L-2/X-300- L-2/X-301- L-2/X-302- L-2/X-303- L-2/X-304-
L-2/X-305- L-2/X-306- L-2/X-307- L-2/X-308- L-2/X-309- L-2/X-310-
L-2/X-31 1- L-2/X-312- L-2/X-313- L-2/X-314- L-2/X-315- L-2/X-316- L-2/X-317- L-2/X-318- L-2/X-319- L-2/X-320- L-2/X-321 - L-2/X-322- -101-
L-2/X-323- L-2 X-324- L-2/X-325- L-2/X-326- L-2/X-327- L-2 X-328-
L-2/X-329- L-2/X-330- L-2/X-331- L-2/X-332- L-2/X-333- L-2/X-334-
L-2/X-335- L-2/X-336- L-2/X-337- L-2/X-338- L-2/X-339- L-2/X-340-
L-2/X-341- L-2/X-342- L-2/X-343- L-2/X-344- L-2/X-345- L-2/X-346- L-2/X-347- L-2/X-348- L-2/X-349- L-2/X-350- L-2/X-351 - L-2/X-352-
L-2/X-353- L-2/X-354- L-2/X-355- L-2/X-356- L-2/X-357- L-2/X-358-
L-2/X-359- L-2 X-360- L-2/X-361- L-2/X-362- L-2/X-363- L-2/X-364-
L-2/X-365- L-2 X-366- L-2/X-367- L-2/X-368- L-2/X-369- L-2/X-370-
L-2/X-371- L-2/X-372- L-2/X-373- L-2/X-374- L-2/X-375- L-2/X-376- L-2/X-377- L-2/X-378- L-2/X-379- L-2/X-380- L-2/X-381- L-2/X-382-
L-2/X-383- L-2/X-384- L-2/X-385- L-2/X-386- L-2/X-387- L-2 X-388-
L-2/X-389- L-2/X-390- L-2/X-391- L-2/X-392- L-2/X-393- L-2/X-394-
L-2 X-395- L-2/X-396- L-2/X-397- L-2/X-398- L-2/X-399- L-2/X-400-
L-2/X-401- L-2/X-402- L-2/X-403- L-2/X-404- L-2/X-405- L-2/X-406- L-2/X-407- L-2/X-408- L-2/X-409- L-2/X-410- L-2/X-41 1- L-2/X-412-
L-2/X-413- L-2/X-414- L-2/X-415- L-2/X-416- L-2/X-417- L-2/X-418- and so on, substituting L-2 with L-3 through L-8.
Utility, Testing, and Administration Utility
The multibinding compounds of this invention are muscarinic receptor antagonists, in particular M3 muscarinic receptor antagonists. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by these receptors such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, irritable bowel syndrome, urinary incontinence, and the like.
Testing The ability of the compounds of formula (I) to inhibit a muscarinic receptor, such as M3 subtype may be demonstrated by a variety of in vitro assays and in vivo assays described in Examples 19-24. -102-
Pharmaceutical Formulations When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of this invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described herein associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders. In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth. gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone. cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally -103- include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.001 to about 1 g, more usually about 1 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Preferably, the compound of Formula (I) above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then -104- subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention. The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil. sesame oil, coconut oil. or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner. -105-
EXAMPLES
The following preparations and examples are given to enable those skilled in the art to more clearly understand and to practice the present invention. They should not be considered as limiting the scope of the invention, but merely as being illustrative and representative thereof.
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. Unless otherwise stated, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning.
gram mg milligram min minute ml milliliter mmol millimol
Synthetic Examples
Example 1
Synthesis of 4-piperidyl-N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000126_0001
Step l
In a 50 ml sealed tube was added 2-biphenylylisocyanate (8 g, 41 mmol) in 40 ml anhydrous acetonitrile. To this solution was added N-benzyl-4-piperidinol (9.8 g, 51.25 mmol) and the tube was partially immersed in a silicon oil bath and heated to 85 °C. After 16 h, the reaction mixture was cooled and concentrated in vacuo to give a 1 -benzyl-4-piperidyl N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate which was used in the next step without further purification. Step 2 -106-
1 -Benzyl-4-piperidyl N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate (12.5 g, 32.3 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous methanol (150 ml) and formic acid (25 ml, 660 mmol) and the solution was flushed with gaseous nitrogen for 15 min. 10% Palladium on carbon (3 g) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen atmosphere . After 18 h, the reaction mixture was filtered through CeliteR and the filtrate was concentrated to give a yellow solid. The solid was partitioned between 0.1 N hydrochloric acid (300 ml) and diethyl ethr (300 ml). The aqueous layer was washed with diethyl ether and then basified with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution to pH 12. A white solid precipitated out which was extracted into ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and evaporated to dryness to give 4-piperidyl N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate as a colorless solid (6.63 g, 69%). MS= 296.9 MH+.
Example 2 Synthesis of 4-piperidyl benzhydrylcarbamate
Figure imgf000127_0001
Step l l-Benzyl-4-piperidinol (2.09 g, 10.9 mmol) and 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (2.2 g, 10.9 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (10 ml). To this solution was added diisopropylethylamine (1.4 g, 10.9 mmol) and the resulting yellow solution was stirred at room temperature. After 3 h, aminodiphenylmethane (2 g, 10.9 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at 65 °C. After 3 h, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and stirred for an additional 12 h. The resulting solid was filtered, washed with cold acetonitrile to give 1- benzyl-4-piperidyl benzhydrylcarbamate (1.3 g, 50%) as a colorless solid which was used in the next step without further purification. -107-
Step 2
1 -benzyl-4-piperidyl benzhydrylcarbamate (1.1 g, 4.5 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous methanol (15 ml) and formic acid (5 ml, 132 mmol) and the solution was flushed with gaseous nitrogen for 15 min. 10% Palladium on carbon (0.3 g) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen atmosphere . After 18 h, the reaction mixture was filtered through CeliteR and the filtrate was concentrated to give a yellow solid. The solid was partitioned between 0.1 N hydrochloric acid (300 ml) and diethyl ether (300 ml). The aqueous layer was washed with diethyl ether and then basified with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution to pH 12. A white solid precipitated out which was extracted into ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and evaporated to dryness to give 4-piperidyl benzhydrylcarbamate (108) as a colorless solid (0.65 g, 78%). MS= 311.3 MH+.
Example 3
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,3-dimethyl)-N-(6-bromohexyl)aminopropyl)phthalimide quaternary ammonium salt
Figure imgf000128_0001
Step l
N-(3-bromopropyl)phthalimide (10 g, 37.3 mmol) was dissolved in dry acetonitrile (100 ml) and a solution of dimethylamine in tetrahydrofuran (56 ml, 111 mmol, 2 M) was added. The flask was fitted with a reflux condense and the solution was heated at reflux. After 22 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give a yellow oil which was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 M sodium carbonate solution saturated with sodium chloride. The organic phase was collected and washed with brine, dried over potassium carbonate, filtered and concentrated to give a yellow oil. The oil was dissolved in methanol (25 ml) and p- -108- toluenesulfonic acid (7.80 g, 41 mmol) was added. The solution was diluted with ether to crystallize the N-(3,3-dimethylaminopropyl)phthalimide as the p- toluenesulfonic acid salt (8.0 g). MS (M-OTs)+ 233.1. Step 2 p-Toluenesulfonic acid salt of N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)phthalimide (0.42 g, 0.98 mmol) was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 M sodium carbonate. The aqueous phase was separated, saturated with sodium chloride and then extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were washed with water and brine, dried over potassium carbonate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil. The oil was dissolved in dry acetonitrile (10 ml) and 1 ,6-dibromohexane (1.21 g, 4.90 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and diluted with one volume of ether. The resulting solids were filtered to give N-[N- (3,3-dimethyl)-N-(6-bromohexyl)aminopropyl)phthalimide quaternary ammonium salt as a white solid. MS 395.2 (M-Br)+.
Example 4 Synthesis of N-(2-methy laminoethy l)phthalimido
Figure imgf000129_0001
Step l N-Methylethylenediamine (3.38 g, 45.6 mmol) was dissolved in chloroform
(60 ml) and a solution of N-carbethoxyphthalimide (10 g, 45.6 mmol) in chloroform (30 ml) was added rapidly. After 6 h, the clear solution was concentrated in vacuo to give an iol which was dissolved in methanol. acidifed with 4 M hydrochloric acid in dioxane (15 ml). Diethyl ether was added to crystallize N-(2-methylaminoethyl)- phthalimido as the chloride salt (9.25 g, 84%). MS 205 (M-Cl^ -109-
Example 5 Synthesis of O-(2-methoxybenzyl)-6-dimethylaminohexanol
Figure imgf000130_0001
6-(Dimethylamino)hexanol (8.80 g, 60.6 mmol) was dissolved in an anhydrous 2:1 mixture of tetrahydrofuran and dimethylformamide (150 ml) and the solution was cooled in an ice bath. Sodium hydride (60% in oil, 3.23 g, 80.8 mmol) was added in portions and after 5 min. the water bath was removed. After 45 min., 2-methoxybenzyl chloride (6.28 g, 40.4 mmol) was added. After 4 h, the reaction mixture was quenched with 1 M sodium thiosulfate and tetrahydrofuran was removed in vacuo. The reaction mixture was washed with ethyl acetate and the aqueous phase was basified with 3 m sodium hydroxide, followed by extraction with ether. The ether layer was dried over potassium carbonate, filtered and acidified with 4 M hydrochloric acid in dioxane. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was crystallized form ethanol/ether to give O- (2-methoxybenzyl)-6-dimethylaminohexanol as the hydrochloride salt (10.4 g, 85%). MS (M-C1)+ 266.3.
Example 6 Synthesis of 1 -N-[N-(3,3-dimethylaminopropyl)phthalimidO)-6-[4-piperidyl- N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate hydrobromide salt
Figure imgf000130_0002
To N-[N-(3,3-dimethyl)-N-(6-bromohexyl)aminopropyl)phthalimide quaternary ammonium salt (16 mg, 0.03 mmol) , prepared as above, in acetonitrile -110-
(1 ml) was added 4-piperidyl N-(2-biphenylyl)carbamate (10 mg, 0.03 mmol), prepared as above, and the reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 3 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, and the product precipitated as the hydrobromide salt. The solids were isolated by filtration to give 20 mg (77%) of the desired product as white solids. The product was characterized by NMR (MeOH) and MS (calculated, (M-HBr2)+ = 611.3600; found, 611.5).
Example 7 Synthesis of compounds of Formula (I) via combinatorial chemistry
-111-
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000132_0002
—112—
An aliquot (0.22 mL) of a solution prepared from N-[2-dimethylamino)- ethyl]phthalimido 14 (1.25 g, 3.2 mmol) and EtNiPr2 (0.79 mL) dissolved in enough anhydrous acetonitrile to bring the total volume up 6.4 mL was added to a 1 dram vial charged with 2,6-bis(bromomethyl)pyridine (Aldrich, 26.5 mg, 0.10 mmol) in 0.22 mL of acetonitrile). The vial was closed with a Teflon sealed cap and the placed in a 72 °C heating block for a 24 h to give a mixture of compounds 15, 16, and 17. After cooling to room temperature, 4-piperidyl-N-(2-biphenyl)-carbamate 18 (0.33 mL) (prepared by dissolving 2.96 g of 18 in anhydrous DMF to produce a total volume of 33 mL) was added and the vial is resealed and heated overnight at 72 °C in a heating block. The mixture was cooled, quenched with 5% TF A/water (0.30 mL), diluted with acetonitrile and water, filtered, and purified using preperative LC/MS [ Zeng, L; Kassel, D. B. Anal. Chem. 1998, 70. 4380-4388 and references therein] to provide the individual components. Quality and identity of the collected fractions was verified using analytical HPLC and electrospray MS.
-113-
Example 8 Synthesis of compounds of Formula (I) via combinatorial chemistry
Figure imgf000134_0001
28
N-(2-Methylaminethyl)phthalimido 23 (0.20 mL, of a 0.5 M solution, 0.10 mmol) (prepared by dissolving 168 mg of N-(2-methylaminethyl)phthalimido in, DIPEA (0.18 mL) and enough anhydrous acetonitrile to bring the solution to a total volume of 1.4 mL), and a solution of compound 22 (0.167 mL) (prepared by dissolving 673 mg of 22 in enough anhydrous acetonitrile to bring the total volume to 4 mL), and Nal (0.20 mL of a 1 M solution in anhydrous acetonitrile) were combined in a 1 dram vial charged with 1,11-dibromoundecane (0.10 mmol). The —114— vial was closed with a Teflon sealed cap and the placed in a 72 °C heating block for a 21 h. The mixture was cooled, quenched with 5% TF A/water (0.30 mL), diluted with acetonitrile and water, filtered, and purified using preperative LC/MS [ Zeng, L; Kassel, D. B. Anal. Chem. 1998, 70, 4380-4388 and references therein] to provide the individual components 26-28. Quality and identity of the collected fractions was verified using analytical HPLC and electrospray MS.
Following the procedures described above but substituting appropriate starting materials, compounds of Formula (I) listed in Table III below were prepared.
—115—
TABLE 3
# STRUCTURE
H - ^CH3
Figure imgf000136_0001
—115/1—
TABLE 3 UCTURE
Figure imgf000137_0001
—115/2—
TABLE 3
STRUCTURE
Figure imgf000138_0001
H3C CH-
Figure imgf000138_0002
Figure imgf000139_0001
—115/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000140_0001
TABLE 3 RUCTURE
Figure imgf000141_0001
-116/1—
TABLE 3
STRUCTURE
Figure imgf000142_0001
—116/2—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000143_0001
—116/3—
TABLE 3
STRUCTURE
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000144_0002
—116/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000145_0001
—117-
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000146_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000147_0001
-117/2—
TABLE 3 CTURE
Figure imgf000148_0001
—117/3-
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000149_0001
-117/4—
Figure imgf000150_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000151_0001
—118/1—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000152_0001
—118/2—
Figure imgf000153_0001
—118/3-
Figure imgf000154_0001
—118/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000155_0001
-119—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000156_0001
—119/1-
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000157_0001
—119/2—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000158_0001
—119/3—
Figure imgf000159_0001
—119/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000160_0001
-120—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000161_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000162_0001
—120/2—
Figure imgf000163_0001
-120/3—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000164_0001
—120/4—
Figure imgf000165_0001
—121—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000166_0001
—121/1—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000167_0001
-121/2—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000168_0001
—121/3—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000169_0001
—121/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000170_0001
-122—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000171_0001
—122/1—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000172_0001
-122/2—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000173_0001
—122/3-
Figure imgf000174_0001
—122/4—
Figure imgf000175_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000176_0001
Figure imgf000177_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000178_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000179_0001
-123/4—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000180_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000181_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000182_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000183_0001
—124/3—
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000184_0001
-125-
Formulation Examples
Example 9
Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule
Active Ingredient 30.0
Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearate 5.0
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Example 10 A tablet Formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 25.0 Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
Stearic acid 5.0
The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Example 11 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components: Ingredient Weight %
Active Ingredient 5
Lactose 95
The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance. -126-
Example 12 Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/tablefl
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone
(as 10% solution in sterile water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 1.0 mg
Total 120 mg
The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh
U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60° C and passed through a 16 mesh
U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
Example 13
Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
Quantity Ingredient ( mg/capsule) Active Ingredient 40.0 mg
Starch 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg
Total 150.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg -127- quantities.
Example 14
Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 25 mg
Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg
The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
Example 15 Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11%)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose 1.75 g
Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to 5.0 mL
The active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Example 16 -128- A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule) Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg
Total 425.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities.
Example 17
A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 5.0 mg
Corn Oil 1.0 mL
Example 18
A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity Active Ingredient 1-10 g
Emulsifying Wax 30 g
Liquid Paraffin 20 g
White Soft Paraffin to 100 g
The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the -129- compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 1 1, 1991, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, edited by E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Company, 18th ed., 1990).
Biological Examples
Example 19 M3 Muscarinic Receptor In Vitro Binding Assay The M3 muscarininc receptor binding activity of compounds of the invention was tested as follows: SF9 cell membranes containing human M3 muscarinic receptor was obtained from NEN (Boston, MA). In 96-well microtiter plates, eight serial five-fold dilutions were prepared with the compound to be assayed; the highest concentration was typically 4μM (4x the final concentration). To 100 μl of compound dilution was added 150 μL M3 receptor membrane preparation in PBS/1. OmM MgCl2/pH 7.4. 50 μl of 3.2 nM 3H-N-methylscopolamine radioligand was added. The total volume in each well was then 300μl. The filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 μl PBS. The assay plate was incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking. The contents of the assay plate were then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200 μl PBS. About 40 μl of scint was added to each well and then the plate was allowed to sit at room temperature for 2h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on a Packard top counter. The raw data was fit to a standard 4-parameter equation given below and a value of IC50 obtained. Y=(a-d)/( 1 +(x/c)b) + d where -130-
Y = cpm a = total binding b = slope c = IC50 x = [compound] d = nonspecific binding
A similar protocol was used to measure Ml, M2, M4 and M5 human muscarinic receptor activity.
Example 20 Rat Heart Muscarinic Receptor In Vitro Binding Assay Tissue (rat heart) muscarininc receptor binding activity of compounds of the invention was tested as follows:
First, muscarinic receptor enriched membranes were isolated from whole hearts (Pelfreeze Laboratories). Rat heart tissue was typically prepared as follows. 25 μl of ice cold buffer (20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCl, at pH 7.5 with "Complete" protease inhibitor cocktail purchased from Boehringer Mannheim was added into an oakridge tube. To the tube was then added 2g of rat heart (purchased from Harlan). The contents of the tube were then transferred to a wheaton glass cylinder and homogenized using a Polytron homogenizer (setting 22, 15 seconds x2), and then transferred back to the oakridge tube, and centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1500g. The supernatant was removed and then centrifuged for 20 minutes at 45000g. The supernatant was removed and the pellet resuspended in 5mL buffer and transferred to a wheaton glass cylinder. This material was then homogenized using a Potter type glass teflon homogenizer with 7-8 passes. The material is then transferred to an oakridge tube and the total volume brought up to 25mL. This volume is then centrifuged for 20 minutes at 45000g, and the pellet resuspended in 2mL buffer using 2 passes of a teflon homogenizer, and stored at -80 degrees C until used.
Second, a protocol similar to that used for cloned receptor binding was used: Eight serial five-fold dilutions are prepared with the compound to be assayed; the highest concentration was typically 4uM (4x the final concentration). To 50 μl of compound dilution in a 96-well assay plate is added an appropriate amount of rat -131- heart membrane (usually 12.5 μl of membrane prep in 87.5 μl of 20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCL at pH 7.5). The amount of membrane added depends in general on the results of signal optimization, and ranges from 6.25-12.5 μl. Last, 50 μl of 2.12nM 3H-N-methylscopolamine radioligand was added. The total volume in each well was 200 μl. The filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 μl PBS. The assay plate was incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking. The contents of the assay plate were then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200ul PBS. About 40 μl of scint was added to each well and then the plate was allowed to sit at room temperature for 18h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on the Packard counter. The data was fit to the four parameter fit described above in Example 19.
A similar procedure was used to measure muscarinic receptor binding at rat submaxillary gland, rat bladder, guinea pig heart, guinea pig submaxillary gland, and guinea pig bladder.
Example 21
Rat Bladder M3 In Vitro Binding Assay Bladder was comprised of both M2 and M3 muscarinic receptors. The ratio was typically 4:1 M2:M3. In order to measure binding of test compounds to one of M2 or M3, the other was blocked with a reversible ligand that binds selectively to that receptor. The following example illustrates the procedure for M3 bladder binding.
Membranes from rat bladder were prepared in a similar fashion to that used to isolate heart membrane above. Eight serial five-fold dilutions are prepared with the compound to be assayed in compound dilution buffer (20 mM HEPES/lOOmM NaCl/1 OmM MgCl2/4 μM Methoctramine); the highest concentration was typically -132-
4 μM (4x the final concentration). The concentration of methoctramine was sufficient to block >99% of the M2 receptor in bladder, but less than 40% of the M3 receptor in bladder. To 50 μl of compound dilution in a 96-well assay plate is added an appropriate amount of rat heart membrane (usually 25 μl of membrane prep in 75 μl of 20mM HEPES, lOOmM NaCl/lOmM MgCl2 at pH 7.5). The amount of membrane added depended in general on the results of signal optimization, and ranged from 12.5-25. Last, 50 μl of 2.12 nM 3H-N- methylscopolamine radioligand in compound dilution buffer was added. The total volume in each well was 200 μl. The final concentration of Methoctramine is 2 μM. The filter plate was pre-blocked using 0.3% PEI for at least 15 minutes, and then washed twice with 200 μl PBS. The assay plate is incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with gentle shaking. The contents of the assay plate are then transferred to the filter plate, and washed three times using 200 μl PBS. About 40 μl of scint is added to each well and then the plate is allowed to sit at room temperature for 18h, and then counted using a Packard Topcount NXT. Counting was typically performed for 1 minute per well using a standard protocol on the Packard counter, and the data was fit to the four parameter equation described in Example 19.
A similar procedure was used to measure binding at bladder M2, but in this case, 2 μM Darifenacin was used to block >99% of the M2 receptor, but minimal M3 receptor.
Example 22 Ex Vivo Rat Bladder Contraction Assay The ability of the test compound to inhibit cholinergically stimulated bladder contraction was tested as follows:
Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 - 300 g are killed by CO, overdose. The bladder was removed and placed in a petri dish containing Krebs-Henseleit solution at room temperature. The apex and dome areas of the bladder were discarded and the remaining tissue cut into longitudinal strips (4 from each rat). The strips were mounted in an organ bath containing Krebs-Henseleit solution at 37 —133—
°C, under a resting tension of 0.5g. The tissues were allowed to equilibrate for 60mins. (washes at 0, 30 and 60mins). Tension was readjusted to lg as necessary. A cumulative concentration response curve to carbachol (10-8M to 10-5M (e.g.) in 3-fold increments) was constructed in each tissue. Tissues were then washed every 5min. for 30min. and tension readjusted to lg. A further 30min. later, muscarinic antagonist (typically Ixl0-7M) or vehicle was added. 30min. after antagonist or vehicle addition, a cumulative concentration response curve to carbachol (10-8M to 10-3M (e.g.)) was constructed. Data from each concentration response curve was expressed as a percentage of the maximum contraction to carbachol. The EC50 values were calculated. The concentration-ratios were calculated taking into account any spontaneous shift in the control tissue. For competitive antagonists, the pKb value was calculated using the following equation: pKb = -log [antagonist concentration]
CR-
Example 23
In Vivo Rat Salivation Assay Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 - 300 g were anesthetized with pentobarbital (60mg/kg i.p.). Rats were placed on a heated blanket under a 20 degree incline. A swab was placed in the rat's mouth. Muscarinic antagonist or vehicle was administered i.v. via the tail vein. 5 min. later, oxotremorine
(0.3mg/kg) was administered s.c. The swab was discarded and replaced by a pre- weighed swab. Saliva was then collected for 15min. After 15min., the swab was weighed and the difference in its weight was used to calculate the antisecretory potency of the antagonists. The ID50 value for each antagonist is calculated using the four parameter fit equation given above. -134-
Example 24 In Vivo Bladder Assay Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 - 300 g were anesthetized with urethane (1.3 g/kg, i.p.), inactin (25 mg/kg, i.p.), and xylazine (4 mg, i.p.). The jugular (or femoral) vein was Isolate and ligated and a small incision was made in the vein distal to the ligation. A catheter (micro-Renathane tubing (0.014 mm ID x 0.033 mm OD) was filled with saline was nserted into the vein and secured into place with suture thread. The trachea was isolated and place da small hole between two of the rings. Tubing (1.57 mm ID x 2.08 mm OD) was inserted into the trachea and tied into place with suture thread. The incision was closed leaving the tubing exposed. The tracheotomy was to prevent the animal from asphyxiating on his own saliva following oxotremorine administration. The stomach was shaved and then cleaned with ethanol. A midline sagital incision was made in the skin and muscle layers of the lower stomach. The bladder was exposed and the saline filled cannula (22-gauge needle attached to a pressure transducer with PE 90 tubing) was inserted into the apex of the bladder to the most distal part of the bladder. The bladder was placed back into the peritoneal cavity. The bladder was emptied manually by disconnecting the cannula and allowing the contents to flow out until the bladder was approximately 1 cm in diameter. The incision was closed with suture thread, first the muscle layer, then the skin in order to keep the bladder moist and warm. The exposed portion of the cannula to the skin surface was sutured to hold it in place. After 15 min. oxotremorine (0.3 mg/kg, SC, baseweight) was injected. After 10 min. (or until baseline stabilizes) a test compound or a reference standard was injected with a dose equivalent to 0.005 - 0.01 mg/kg, IV, baseweight of atropine that produces a 30-70% decrease in intraluminal pressure. After 5 min. a high dose of atropine 0.1 mg/kg was injected, IV to establish the true 100% inhibition point.
For data analyses, first determine oxotremorine response (zero inhibition) by measuring the mean pressure 1 minute prior to the antagonist injection. Then, to assess antagonist inhibition, measure the mean pressure beginning 1 minute and ending 2 minutes after antagonist administration. If the pressure has not leveled off -135- after 1 minute, wait until it is stable and then take a 1 -minute sample of the mean. Lastly, to determine the true 100% inhibition point, measure the mean pressure beginning 1 minutes and ending 2 minutes after the high dose atropine challenge. The percent inhibition by the antagonist can be determined by the ratio of the decrease from the zero to 100% values.
The formula is: oxotremorine mean - treatment mean * 100 oxotremorine mean - atropine mean.
The foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example, for purposes of clarity and understanding. It will be obvious to one of skill in the art that changes and modifications may be practiced within the scope of the appended claims. Therefore, it is to be understood that the above description is intended to be illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the invention should, therefore, be determined not with reference to the above description, but should instead be determined with reference to the following appended claims, along with the full scope of equivalents to which such claims are entitled.
All patents, patent applications and publications cited in this application are hereby incoφorated by reference in their entirety for all puφoses to the same extent as if each individual patent, patent application or publication were so individually denoted.

Claims

-136-
WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and further provided that when the multibinding compound comprises of 2 or 3 ligands, then only one of the ligands. is 1 l-acetyl-5,1 l-dihydro-6H-pyrido[2,3b][l,4]- benzodiazepin-6-one, N-methylquiniclidine, or a compound of formula:
al
Figure imgf000196_0001
wherein: na is 0 or 1 ;
Rc is hydrogen or alkyl;
Rd is hydrogen; and
Re is -C02CRf (phenyl), wherein Rf is hydrogen or hydroxy.
A multibinding compound of Formula (I):
( )p(X)q (I) wherein: each L is, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an -137- allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor; each X is independently a linker; p is an integer of from 2 to 10; and q is an integer of from 1 to 20, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and further provided that when the multibinding compound comprises of 2 or 3 ligands, then only one of the ligands. is 11 -acetyl-5,11 -dihydro-6H- pyrido[2,3][l,4]benzodiazepin-6-one, N-methylquiniclidine, or a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000197_0001
wherein: na is 0 or 1 ;
Rc is hydrogen or alkyl;
Rd is hydrogen; and
Re is -CO,CRf (phenyl), wherein Rf is hydrogen or hydroxy.
The multibinding compound of Claim 2 wherein q is less than/?.
4. The multibinding compound of Claim 3 wherein each ligand, L, that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) : — 138—
Figure imgf000198_0001
(a) wherein:
A is an aryl or a heteroaryl ring;
R1 is hydrogen or alkyl;
R2 is selected from a group consisting of formula (i), (ii), (iii). or "Het":
| E>)Π1 , - * ■ - *7 . or "Het"
R Ro
(i) (ϋ) (iii)
wherein: is an optional double bond; n, is an integer of from 1 to 4; n2 is an integer of from 1 to 3; V is -CH-, -0-, -S(O)n3- (where n3 is an integer of from 0 to 2). or -NR4-
(wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl);
"Het" is a heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker:
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORa (where Ra is hydrogen, alkyl, or acyl), or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORb (where Rb is hydrogen or alkyl), aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl. alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching —139— the ligand to a linker;
K is a bond or an alkylene group;
K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(0)n4- (where n4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group; and B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; provided that at least one of the R5, R6, R7, R8, "Het", or the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker; (2) a compound of formula (b) :
Figure imgf000199_0001
(b) wherein:
C is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; R9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R'° is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
Q is a single bond or -C(0)0- such that: when Q is a bond then, Q" is a group of formula (iv):
Figure imgf000199_0002
(iv) where: -140-
E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W- R11 wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -0-, -S-, or -NRg- (wherein Rg is hydrogen or alkyl); and
R" is a group of formula (v), (vi), or "Het":
Figure imgf000200_0001
(v) (vi)
wherein:
T and U are, independently of each other, -O- or -CH2-; n5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and
"Het" is heteroaryl provided that at least one of C, E, R9, andR10 attaches the ligand to a linker; and when Q is -C(0)0- or -NHC(0)0- then, Q" is a group of formula (vii) or
(viii):
Figure imgf000200_0002
wherein: n6 is 0 or 1 ; M" is a counterion; R12 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R13 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and J is: -141-
-(CH 2)2-, -(CH 2)3-, or CH -
"CHx / O
provided that at least one of the C, R9, R10. R12, R13. and R14 attaches the ligand to a linker;
(3) a compound of formula (c):
Figure imgf000201_0001
wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000201_0002
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1, provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinclidine ring attaches the ligand to the linker then n7 is 0; n8 is 1 or 2; g is an integer of from 0 to 3 ; each R15 is, independently of each other, hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; -142-
G is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or cycloalkyl which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; and
G" is a single bond or an alkylene group provided that at least one of the R'\ G, and G" attaches the ligand to a linker; (4) a compound of formula (d) :
Figure imgf000202_0001
(d) wherein: n9 is 1 or 2; n10 is 0 or 1 provided that n9+n10 are 1 or 2; P is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
P" is a single bond or an alkylene group;
S is a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the P and S attaches the ligand to a linker; (5) a compound of formula (e):
Figure imgf000202_0002
(e) wherein:
R16 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R17, R18, and R'9 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carbamoyl, sulfanoyl, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; -143-
R20 and R21 are, indepenαently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or R20 and R 1 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R16, R17, R18, R19, R20. and R21 attaches the ligand to a linker; or (6) a compound of formula (f):
Figure imgf000203_0001
(f) wherein:
R22 is hydrogen or halo; R23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl;
R24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R23 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R25 and R26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R24, R2\ and R26 attaches the ligand to a linker.
5. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein each ligand, L, that is a allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (g) :
Figure imgf000203_0002
(g) wherein: -144-
D" is alkylene;
D is -NR31R32, -N+(R33R34R35) or -OR32 where R3', R33, and R34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl; and R32 and R35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two, or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R29 and R30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R27, R28, R29, or R30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group; or (2) a compound of formula (h):
Figure imgf000204_0001
(h) wherein: -145- nu is an integer of from 1 to 7; n12 is an integer of from 0 to 7;
F is -NR40-, -0-, -S-, or -CHR41- (wherein R40 and R41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl); F" is a covalent bond, -OR43, -NR42R43, or -N+R4 R44R45 wherein R42 is hydrogen or alkyl, R44 and R45 are alkyl. and R43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl. alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and
R38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of R38 and R43 attaches the ligand to a linker.
6. The multibinding compound of Claim 5 wherein each linker independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Yb-Z-Xa-
wherein -146- m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -C(0)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y and Yb at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR' C(O)-, -NR' C(0)NR'-, -NR' C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR'-, -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(0)-NR'-, -NR'- C(0)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR')-, - S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n-, -S-S-, and a covalent bond; where n is 0. 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
7. The multibinding compound of Claim 6 wherein p is 2 and q is 1.
8. The multibinding compound of Claim 7 wherein both the ligands are muscarinic receptor antagonists.
9. The multibinding compound of Claim 8 wherein the ligands are selected from a group consisting of: ( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) :
Figure imgf000206_0001
-147- (a) in:
A is a phenyl;
R1 is hydrogen;
R2 is a group of formula (iii):
Figure imgf000207_0001
(iϋ)
wherein:
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, nitro. hydroxy, or amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
K and K" are a single bond; and B is either:
(i) pyrrolidine, piperidine, or hexahydroazepine which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; or
(ii) quinuclidine. l-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, or l-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl optionally atttach the ligand to a linker wherein a bridge head carbon atom or a carbon atom adjacent thereto is the binding position with the oxygen atom; (2) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000207_0002
(b) wherein: when Q is a single bond then:
C and R10 are a phenyl ring; -148-
R9 is aminocarbonyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and Q" is a group of formula (iv):
Figure imgf000208_0001
(iv) where: E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W-
R" wherein W is -(CH2)2- or -(CH2)3- and R" is a group of formula (v):
Figure imgf000208_0002
(v)
and when Q is -NHC(0)0- then: R9 is hydrogen;
C and R10 are phenyl; and
Q" is a group of formula (viii):
Figure imgf000208_0003
wherein n^ is 0 and R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; (3) a compound of formula (c): -149-
Figure imgf000209_0001
wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000209_0002
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1 provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinchdine ring attaches the ligand to a linker then n7 is 0; n8 is 2; g is O;
G is phenyl which optionally link the ligand to a linker; and G" is a single bond; (4) a compound of formula (e):
Figure imgf000209_0003
e) wherein:
R16 is methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker; R17 is either meta or para to the -OR16 group and is hydrogen, hydroxy, methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker; -150-
R18 an R19 are hydrogen; and
R20and R21 are, independently of each other. N,N-(isopropyl)amino, N- methyl-N-tert-butylamino, or one of R20 and R21 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or (5) a compound of formula (f):
Figure imgf000210_0001
(f) wherein:
R22 is hydrogen; R23 is cyclohexyl; R24 is hydroxy or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker.
10. The multibinding compound of Claim 7 wherein one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist and the other is a modulator of a muscarinic receptor.
11. The multibinding compound of Claim 10 wherein the ligand that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: (1) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000210_0002
(a) wherein:
A is a phenyl; —151—
R1 is hydrogen;
R2 is a group of formula (iii):
Figure imgf000211_0001
(iii)
wherein:
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, nitro, hydroxy, or amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
K and K" are a single bond; and
B is either:
(i) pyrrolidine, piperidine, or hexahydroazepine optionally attaching the ligand to a linker; or (ii) quinuclidine, l-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, or l-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl optionally atttaching the ligand to a linker wherein a bridge head carbon atom or a carbon atom adjacent thereto is the binding position with the oxygen atom; (2) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000211_0002
(b) wherein: when Q is a single bond then:
C and R10 are a phenyl ring;
R9 is aminocarbonyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and Q" is a group of formula (iv): -152-
Figure imgf000212_0001
(iv) where:
E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W- R1 ' wherein W is -(CH2)2- or -(CH2)3-, and R1 ' is a group of formula (v):
Figure imgf000212_0002
(v)
and when Q is -NHC(0)0- then: R9 is hydrogen; C and R10 are phenyl; and Q" is a group of formula (viii):
Figure imgf000212_0003
(viii)
wherein rig is 0 and R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; (3) a compound of formula (c):
Figure imgf000212_0004
■153- wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000213_0001
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1 provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinchdine ring attaches the ligand to a linker then n7 is 0; n8 is 2; g is O;
G is phenyl which optionally link the ligand to a linker; and G" is a single bond; (4) a compound of formula (e):
Figure imgf000213_0002
(e) wherein:
R16 is methyl or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
R17 is either meta or para to the -OR16 group and is hydrogen, hydroxy, methyl, or a covalent bond linking the ligand to a linker;
R18 an R19 are hydrogen; and
R 0 and R21 are, independently of each other, N,N-(isopropyl)amino, N- methyl-N-tert-butylamino, or one of R20 and R21 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl and the other is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or (5) a compound of formula (f): -154-
Figure imgf000214_0001
(f) wherein:
R22 is hydrogen;
R23 is cyclohexyl;
R24 is hydroxy or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and the modulator of a muscarinic receptor is selected from a group consisting of: (5) a compound of formula (g):
Figure imgf000214_0002
(g) wherein:
D" is -(CH2)n43- where n43 is an integer of from 2-8; D is -NR31R32, -N+(R33R34R35)M" or -OR32 where R3'. R33, and R34 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or methyl, and R32 and R35 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R27, R28, R29, and R30 are hydrogen; and (6) a compound of formula (h):
Figure imgf000214_0003
( ) -155- wherein: nu is an integer of from 1 to 7; n12 is an integer of from Oto 7;
R36 and R38 are hydrogen. R37 is ortho to the -(CHR38)- group and is hydrogen or methoxy;
F is -0-, -NH-, or -N(CH3)-;
F" is a covalent bond, methylamino, or dimethylamino wherein the nitrogen atom is attached to a linker.
12. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000215_0001
(I) wherein: each L is, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor; each X is independently a linker; p is an integer of from 2 to 10; and q is an integer of from 1 to 20, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist.
13. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 12 wherein q is less than p.
14. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 13 wherein each ligand that is a muscarinic receptor antagonist is independently selected from the group consisting of:
( 1 ) a compound of formula (a) : -156-
Figure imgf000216_0001
(a) wherein:
A is an aryl or a heteroaryl ring;
R1 is hydrogen or alkyl;
R2 is selected from a group consisting of formula (i), (ii), (iii), or "Het":
Figure imgf000216_0002
(i) (iii)
wherein: is an optional double bond; n, is an integer of from 1 to 4; n2 is an integer of from 1 to 3 ; V is -CH-, -0-, -S(0)n3- (where n3 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or -NR4-
(wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl. or heteroaryl);
"Het" is a heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORa (where Ra is hydrogen, alkyl, or acyl), or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, amino, substituted amino, -ORb (where Rb is hydrogen or alkyl), aryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R6, R7, and R8 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl. -157- alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
K is a bond or an alkylene group;
K" is a bond, -C(O)-, -S(0)n4- (where n4 is an integer of from 0 to 2), or an alkylene group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group; and
B is a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; provided that at least one of the R5, R6, R7, R8, "Het", or the heterocycloamino group attaches the ligand to a linker; (2) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000217_0001
(b) wherein:
C is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker; R9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl. alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R10 is hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
Q is a single bond or -C(0)0- such that: when Q is a bond then, Q" is a group of formula (iv):
Figure imgf000217_0002
(iv) -158- where:
E is hydrogen, a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or -CH2-W- Ru wherein W is a single bond or alkylene wherein one of the carbon atoms may optionally be replaced by -0-, -S-, or -NRg- (wherein Rε is hydrogen or alkyl); and R" is a group of formula (v), (vi), or "Het":
Figure imgf000218_0001
(v) (vi)
wherein:
T and U are, independently of each other, -O- or -CH2-; n5 is an integer of from 1 to 3; and
"Het" is heteroaryl provided that at least one of C, E, R9, andR10 attaches the ligand to a linker; and when Q is -C(0)0- or -NHC(0)0- then, Q" is a group of formula (vii) or (viii):
Figure imgf000218_0002
wherein: n6 is 0 or 1 ; M" is a counterion;
R12 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; R13 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R14 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker; and
J is: — 159—
-(CH 2)2-, -(CH 2)3-, or -CH — CH —
provided that at least one of the C, R9, R10, R12, R13, and R14 attaches the ligand to a linker;
(3) a compound of formula (c):
Figure imgf000219_0001
wherein:
G' is pyrrolidine, piperidine, or
Figure imgf000219_0002
which optionally attach the ligand to a linker; n7 is an 0 or 1, provided that when the nitrogen atom of the quinchdine ring attaches the ligand to the linker then n7 is 0; ng is 1 or 2; g is an integer of from 0 to 3; each R15 is, independently of each other, hydrogen, halogen, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy. alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
G is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or cycloalkyl which optionally attach the -160- ligand to a linker; and
G" is a single bond or an alkylene group provided that at least one of the R15, G, and G" attaches the ligand to a linker; (4) a compound of formula (d):
Figure imgf000220_0001
(d) wherein: n9 is 1 or 2; n10 is 0 or 1 provided that n9+n10 are 1 or 2;
P is an aryl or heteroaryl ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker;
P" is a single bond or an alkylene group;
S is a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the P and S attaches the ligand to a linker; (5) a compound of formula (e):
Figure imgf000220_0002
(e) wherein:
R16 is hydrogen, alkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R17, R18, and R'9 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carbamoyl, sulfanoyl, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R20 and R21 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl or a covalent —161 — bond attaching the ligand to a linker; or R20 and R21 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino ring which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R16, R17, R18, R19, R20, and R21 attaches the ligand to a linker; or (6) a compound of formula (f):
Figure imgf000221_0001
wherein:
R22 is hydrogen or halo;
R23 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, or heterocyclylalkyl; R24 is hydroxy, halo, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R25 and R26 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker, or R25 and R26 together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloamino group which optionally attaches the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of the R24, R2\ and R26 attaches the ligand to a linker; and each ligand, L, that is an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) is independently selected from a group consisting of:
(7) a compound of formula (g):
Figure imgf000221_0002
(g) wherein:
D" is alkylene;
D is -NR3,R32, -N+(R33R34R35) or -OR32 where R31, R33, and R34 are, -162- independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, or aralkyl; and R32 and R33 represent a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R27 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido. carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl. or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R28 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two, or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino;
R29 and R30 are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio. amino, mono- or dialkylamino; or one of R27, R28, R29. or R30 together with the adjacent group forms a methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group; or (8) a compound of formula (h):
Figure imgf000222_0001
(h) wherein: nπ is an integer of from 1 to 7; n12 is an integer of from 0 to 7; —163—
F is -NR40-, -0-, -S-, or -CHR41- (wherein R40 and R41 are, independently of each other, hydrogen or alkyl);
F" is a covalent bond, -OR43, -NR42R43, or -N÷R43R44R45 wherein R42 is hydrogen or alkyl, R44 and R45 are alkyl, and R43 is a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker;
R36 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido, alkylsulfonamido, carbamoyl, thiocarbamoyl, mono or dialkylcarbamoyl, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio, heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl. amino, or substituted amino;
R37 is hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thio, alkylthio, amino, mono- or dialkylamino, aryl, aryloxy, arylthio. heteroaryl, heteraryloxy, heteroarylthio, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, or alkyl optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from halo, hydroxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfonyl, amino, or substituted amino; and R38 is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, or a covalent bond attaching the ligand to a linker provided that at least one of R38 and R43 attaches the ligand to a linker; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomers, mixture of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that at least one of the ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist.
15. The pharmaceutical composition Claim 14 wherein each linker independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Yb-Z-Xa- -164- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -C(0)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
Ya and Yb at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR' C(O)-, -NR' C(0)NR'-, -NR' C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR'-, -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(0)-NR'-, -NR'- C(0)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR')-, - S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -, -S-S-, and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic.
16. A method for treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers, wherein each of said ligands, comprises, independently of each other, a muscarinic receptor antagonist or an allosteric modulator of a muscarinic receptor provided that at least one of said ligands is a muscarinic receptor antagonist, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
17. A method for treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in a -165- mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Claim 9.
18. A method for treating diseases mediated by a muscarinic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Claim 1 1.
19. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
20. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker -166- comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor.
21. The method according to Claim 19 or 20 wherein the preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b).
22. The method according to Claim 21 wherein the multimeric ligand compounds comprising the multimeric ligand compound library are dimeric.
23. The method according to Claim 22 wherein the dimeric ligand compounds comprising the dimeric ligand compound library are heterodimeric.
24. The method according to Claim 23 wherein the heterodimeric ligand compound library is prepared by sequential addition of a first and second ligand.
25. The method according to Claim 19 or 20 wherein, prior to procedure (d), each member of the multimeric ligand compound library is isolated from the library.
26. The method according to Claim 25 wherein each member of the library is -167- isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
27. The method according to Claim 19 or Claim 20 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers.
28. The method according to Claim 27 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
29. The method according to Claim 28 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A.
30. The method according to Claim 19 or 20 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands.
31. The method according to Claim 30 wherein said reactive functionality is selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
32. The method according to Claim 19 or Claim 20 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
33. The method according to Claim 19 or Claim 20 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds. —168—
34. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
35. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for a muscarinic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
36. The library according to Claim 34 or Claim 35 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, -169- hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and/or polarizability and amphiphilic linkers.
37. The library according to Claim 36 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
38. The library according to Claim 37 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A.
39. The library according to Claim 34 or 35 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands.
40. The library according to Claim 39 wherein said reactive functionality is selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
41. The library according to Claim 35 or Claim 36 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
42. The library according to Claim 34 or Claim 35 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
43. An iterative method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor which method comprises: (a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds -170- which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands;
(b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor;
(c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties for a muscarinic receptor;
(d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above;
(e) creating a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in said first iteration; (f) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted enhanced multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the second collection or iteration recited in (e) above;
(g) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints.
44. The method according to Claim 43 wherein steps (e) and (f) are repeated from 2-50 times.
45. The method according to Claim 44 wherein steps (e) and (f) are repeated from 5-50 times.
PCT/US1999/012733 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonists WO1999064043A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2000553111A JP2002517464A (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonist
CA002315883A CA2315883A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonists
EP99928444A EP1086066A4 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonists
AU45508/99A AU763638B2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonists
NZ505329A NZ505329A (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Two heteroaryl or aryl containing compounds covalently attached via a linker useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US8846698P 1998-06-08 1998-06-08
US60/088,466 1998-06-08
US9293898P 1998-07-15 1998-07-15
US60/092,938 1998-07-15
US12028799P 1999-02-16 1999-02-16
US60/120,287 1999-02-16

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999064043A1 WO1999064043A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999064043A9 true WO1999064043A9 (en) 2000-03-02

Family

ID=27375975

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1999/012733 WO1999064043A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Muscarinic receptor antagonists

Country Status (8)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1086066A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2002517464A (en)
AR (1) AR018629A1 (en)
AU (1) AU763638B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2315883A1 (en)
NZ (1) NZ505329A (en)
SG (1) SG80041A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999064043A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW200800953A (en) 2002-10-30 2008-01-01 Theravance Inc Intermediates for preparing substituted 4-amino-1-(pyridylmethyl) piperidine
PE20040950A1 (en) 2003-02-14 2005-01-01 Theravance Inc BIPHENYL DERIVATIVES AS AGONISTS OF ß2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTORS AND AS ANTAGONISTS OF MUSCARINAL RECEPTORS
EP1615881A2 (en) 2003-04-01 2006-01-18 Theravance, Inc. Diarylmethyl and related compounds having beta2 adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
JP4616264B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2011-01-19 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Azabicycloalkane compounds as muscarinic receptor antagonists
TW200510298A (en) 2003-06-13 2005-03-16 Theravance Inc Substituted pyrrolidine and related compounds
WO2005007645A1 (en) 2003-07-11 2005-01-27 Theravance, Inc. Substituted 4-amino-1-benzylpiperidine compounds
DE602004021959D1 (en) 2003-11-21 2009-08-20 Theravance Inc COMPOUNDS OF AGONISTIC EFFECT ON THE BETA2 ADRENEER RECEPTOR AND THE MUSCARIN RECIPE
TW200538095A (en) 2004-03-11 2005-12-01 Theravance Inc Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
JP2007528408A (en) 2004-03-11 2007-10-11 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Useful biphenyl compounds as muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO2005087734A1 (en) 2004-03-11 2005-09-22 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO2005087739A1 (en) 2004-03-11 2005-09-22 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
TWI341836B (en) 2004-03-11 2011-05-11 Theravance Inc Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
US7560469B2 (en) 2004-03-11 2009-07-14 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
JP2007528412A (en) 2004-03-11 2007-10-11 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO2005087735A1 (en) 2004-03-11 2005-09-22 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO2006099032A1 (en) 2005-03-10 2006-09-21 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
TW200714587A (en) 2005-03-10 2007-04-16 Theravance Inc Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
US7659403B2 (en) 2005-03-10 2010-02-09 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
JP2008537931A (en) 2005-03-10 2008-10-02 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
EP1866284A1 (en) 2005-03-10 2007-12-19 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO2006138218A1 (en) 2005-06-13 2006-12-28 Theravance, Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful as muscarinic receptor antagonists
GB0602778D0 (en) 2006-02-10 2006-03-22 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compound
US8389759B2 (en) * 2007-03-12 2013-03-05 Nektar Therapeutics Oligomer-anticholinergic agent conjugates
CN107849014B (en) * 2015-12-25 2021-07-09 四川海思科制药有限公司 Biphenyl derivative, preparation method and medical application thereof

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4587046A (en) * 1982-05-18 1986-05-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Drug-carrier conjugates
DE3402060A1 (en) * 1984-01-21 1985-08-01 Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh, 7950 Biberach SUBSTITUTED 5,11-DIHYDRO-6H-DIBENZ (B, E) AZEPIN-6-ONE, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS CONTAINING THESE COMPOUNDS
US4675326A (en) * 1985-05-08 1987-06-23 Gabriel Amitai Bisquaternary antidotes
US5534520A (en) * 1990-04-10 1996-07-09 Fisher; Abraham Spiro compounds containing five-membered rings
EP0510132B1 (en) * 1990-09-28 1997-05-14 Neorx Corporation Polymeric carriers for release of covalently linked agents

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
SG80041A1 (en) 2001-04-17
AR018629A1 (en) 2001-11-28
AU4550899A (en) 1999-12-30
EP1086066A1 (en) 2001-03-28
NZ505329A (en) 2003-05-30
AU763638B2 (en) 2003-07-31
CA2315883A1 (en) 1999-12-16
JP2002517464A (en) 2002-06-18
EP1086066A4 (en) 2001-08-08
WO1999064043A1 (en) 1999-12-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6693202B1 (en) Muscarinic receptor antagonists
EP1235803B1 (en) Urea compounds having muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
EP1235802B1 (en) Carbamate derivatives having muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
US6355805B1 (en) β3-adrenergic receptor agonists
AU763638B2 (en) Muscarinic receptor antagonists
WO1999064039A1 (en) Bradykinin antagonists
WO1999064046A9 (en) Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5-ht3 receptors
AU750366B2 (en) Beta2-adrenergic receptor agonists
ZA200004083B (en) H1-histamine receptor antagonists.

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US US US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1999928444

Country of ref document: EP

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US US US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 91-96 AND 115-124, DESCRIPTION, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 91-96 AND 115-124; PAGES 1/4-4/4, DRAWINGS, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 1/3-3/3; DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
ENP Entry into the national phase in:

Ref document number: 2315883

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2315883

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 505329

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2000/03475

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200003475

Country of ref document: ZA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 45508/99

Country of ref document: AU

ENP Entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2000 553111

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1999928444

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 09719054

Country of ref document: US

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 45508/99

Country of ref document: AU

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1999928444

Country of ref document: EP

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务，不要输入任何密码和下载